JP2020078597A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing the attention degree to a game and interest in a game to increase player's desire to play the game.SOLUTION: A game machine 10, in an overlapping period in which an execution period of a touch operation reception period and an execution period of a movable combination member operation performance are overlapped, executes a specific performance different from a touch operation performance, instead of the touch operation performance, in a predetermined period such as execution of a super ready-to-win performance, when presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of a symbol display unit 341 is detected by a plurality of detection sensors 38A to 38D in a case where a big winning determination performance (one-shot notification performance) clearly indicating that a lottery result in a big winning lottery is a big winning is executed as the movable combination member operation performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, there is one in which an effect of operating a movable accessory member called a gimmick is executed as one of the game effects accompanying the progress of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 reference). Further, as the game effect, there is one in which the touch operation effect is executed by touching the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game machine or the like within the operation acceptance period (for example, refer to Patent Document 2).

JP, 2017-136430, A JP, 2017-055786, A

  By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to increase the degree of interest and interest in the game to improve the player's willingness to play.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the degree of interest and interest in the game and improving the player's willingness to play the game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game,
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition,
An image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed,
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
Detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) when moved between a first position (standby position) and a second position (operating position), and when moved between the first position and the second position A movable accessory member (39),
Production execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the course of the game,
Equipped with
The effect execution means (51),
First effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) for a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable effect member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Equipped with
In the overlap period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, an effect that clearly shows that the determination result of the determination means (41) shifts the second effect to the special game state ( When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when executed as a jackpot finalization effect, one-shot notification effect), the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected. It is characterized in that the game effect of the type according to the situation of the case is executed.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the degree of attention to the jackpot game and the interest in the jackpot game can be increased to improve the player's willingness to play the jackpot game.

The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the game machine which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 2 is a development view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a development view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The front view which shows an example of the game board when the movable accessory member of the game machine shown in FIG. 1 is in a standby position. The front view which shows an example of the game board when a movable accessory member is in an operation position. The front view which shows typically the detection range of each detection sensor of the game machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main controller. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interruption process performed with a main control apparatus. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the starting winning process performed by the main timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the 1st hold command setting process performed by the starting winning process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main process performed with a main control apparatus. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variation game control processing performed by the main processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the data setting process performed by the variation game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variation start process performed by the variation game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with the voice lamp control device of the game machine shown in FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of an operation button operation detection process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation detection pattern determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of touch operation detection processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a touch operation detection pattern determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 22A is a diagram showing an example of an operation data table showing the relationship between the operation detection pattern and the operation situation, and FIG. 22B is a touch operation data table showing the relationship between the touch operation detection pattern and the touch operation situation. The figure which shows an example. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the table referred when the fluctuation pattern command is received in the command determination processing of FIG. 23, and FIG. 24(A) is a figure which shows an example of a 1st stop symbol selection table, FIG. 24(B). FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation type table. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern type table that is referred to when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 23. The figure which shows an example of a movable accessory member operation effect. The timing chart which shows an example of the operation timing of a movable accessory member, and an example of a touch operation reception period with an effect pattern. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a movable accessory member operation timing selection table referenced in the movable accessory member operation timing determination processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 23. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a movable accessory member operation timing selection table referenced in the movable accessory member operation timing determination processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 23. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a movable accessory member operation timing selection table referenced in the movable accessory member operation timing determination processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 23. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of touch operation effect determination processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 23. The figure which shows an example of touch operation production. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation production selection table referred by the touch operation production determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation production selection table referred by the touch operation production determination process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variable game effect process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation process performed by the variation game effect process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation production execution process performed by the variation game production process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation production|generation execution process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation production|generation execution process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. 40A is a diagram showing an example of the specific effect determination table referred to in the specific effect determination process of the touch operation effect execution process of FIG. 39, and FIG. 40B is the specific effect determination table of FIG. 40A. The figure which shows the jackpot expectation degree of the specific effect set. The front view which shows an example of the game board when the movable accessory member of the game machine which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention is in a standby position. FIG. 42 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 41. The front view which shows typically the detection range of the detection sensor with respect to the symbol display part of the game machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows typically the detection range of the detection sensor with respect to the display part of the sub movable accessory member of the game machine shown in FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation detection process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 46(A) is a diagram showing an example of a main touch operation data table showing the relationship between the main touch operation detection pattern and the main touch operation situation, and FIG. 46(B) shows the relationship between the sub touch operation detection pattern and the sub touch operation situation. The figure which shows an example of the sub-touch operation data table shown. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation|movement process performed with the voice lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation production|generation execution process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation production performed by the display part of a sub movable accessory member. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation production performed by the display part of a sub movable accessory member. The figure which shows an example of the touch operation production performed by the display part of a sub movable accessory member. The figure which shows an example of the specific production performed with the display part of the sub movable accessory member of the game machine which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation production|generation execution process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation production|generation execution process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the variable game production performed with the game machine which concerns on the 6th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation production|generation execution process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 6th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation production|generation execution process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 6th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the specific production performed with the display part of the main movable accessory member of the game machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the specific production performed by the display part of the main movable accessory member of the game machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation production|generation execution process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation production|generation execution process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the specific production performed by the display part of the sub movable accessory member of the game machine which concerns on the 8th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation production|generation execution process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 8th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation production|generation execution process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 8th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the movable accessory member operation timing selection table referred by the movable accessory member operation timing determination processing performed with the audio|voice lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 9th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the fake operation effect of the movable accessory member performed with the game machine which concerns on the 9th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation|movement process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 9th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation|movement process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 10th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation|movement process performed with the voice lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 11th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation|movement process performed with the voice lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 12th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the continuous production of the movable accessory member operation production|generation and touch operation production performed with the game machine which concerns on the 13th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 13th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation production|generation execution process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 13th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 14th Embodiment of this invention. The front view which shows typically the detection range of the detection sensor with respect to the symbol display part of the game machine which concerns on the 16th embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the touch operation production|generation execution process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 16th Embodiment of this invention.

  Hereinafter, the first to fifteenth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings to provide an understanding of the present invention. In addition, each of the following embodiments is an example embodying the present invention and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 37.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are exploded views of the gaming machine 10, and FIGS. 4 and 5 are front views of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the front-rear, left-right, and up-down expressions used in this embodiment are defined by the front-rear direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine including a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is an island facility (not shown) in a gaming hall. It is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 14. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of the gaming machine, but other types of gaming machines such as a spinning-body gaming machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball gaming machine, and a Jiyan ball gaming machine will be described. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine.

[Structure of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by having the left end portion rotatably supported by the outer frame 14. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by having the left end portion rotatably supported by the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

  The front frame 11 is provided with operation buttons 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination portion 27, and the like.

  The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 7) that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not a pressing operation is performed. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state of the operation button 20 (with or without operation). This operation button 20, the operation of the operation button 20 by the player in a predetermined specific period in the variable game effect (notifying game effect) executed in the variable game that clearly indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. It is operated to execute an operation button effect or the like executed as a trigger.

  The operation button 20 is not limited to being installed in front of the upper plate 23 but may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more. Further, the operation switch 20a is not limited to the contact type switch and may be, for example, a piezoelectric element as long as it can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by the player.

  Further, instead of the operation button 20, it is conceivable that a touch panel that displays a touch key and receives the operation of the touch key by the player is provided. The operation button 20 may be equipped with a jog dial. In these cases, the operation of the player on the touch panel or the panel 25 in the variable game effect is reflected in the operation button effect or the like.

  The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle that the player operates to fire a game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by launching a game ball from a game ball launching mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a strength according to the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, when the player operates the firing handle 22, the game ball firing mechanism 32 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area in 0.6 sec.

  The upper plate 23 is arranged below the panel 25, and stores the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130, which will be described later, and arranges the stored game balls in one row. It is used to guide the game ball launch mechanism 32. Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23, and is used to store the excess game balls in the upper plate 23.

  The panel 25 is colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speaker 26 is a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end of the front frame 11, and has a variable game effect process (see step S1707 and FIG. 35 in FIG. 17) and a jackpot game effect process (see step S1708 in FIG. 17). A voice output effect for outputting a voice is executed. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Further, the illumination unit 27 has a built-in light source such as a display lamp and an LED, and executes a lamp effect by a lighting mode such as lighting or blinking.

[Structure of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In addition, in FIG. 2, the illustration on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of the illustration.

  The control unit 33 includes a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to one direction of the sub control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, on the game board 31, an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first operating opening 314, a second operating opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, The outlet 318, the variable display unit 34, the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, the main display unit 37, a plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, and the movable accessory member 39 are provided.

  The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are conveyance paths for sending out the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. Then, after being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that have not entered the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318. To be done.

  Here, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launching rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 is transferred to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 to the launch rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a driving unit that launches the game balls supplied on the launch rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. Then, in the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is drive-controlled according to the operation of the firing handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 to the game board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that launches the game ball using another driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 4 and FIG. 5, the general winning opening 313, the first working opening 314, the second working opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 are openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. Are formed. Then, on the back surface side of the game board 31, it is possible to individually detect the entry of the game ball corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. Ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 7) are provided. Further, the through gate 317 is a gate through which the game ball can pass, and has a ball entrance sensor 317a (see FIG. 7) capable of individually detecting the game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, there is a possibility that the game ball will pass through the through gate 317 when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes on the right side of the game board 31, that is, when it is hitting to the right.

  The ball entrance sensors 313a to 317a (see FIG. 7) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the ball entrance sensors 313a to 317a are input to the main control unit 331. Hereinafter, the detection of a game ball entering by the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a may be referred to as a winning. Although the ball entrance sensors 313a to 317a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, they may be arbitrary sensors capable of individually detecting the entrance of a game ball by another detection method.

  In addition, the second operating port 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not there is a restriction of entering the game ball into the second operating port 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a drive means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second operating port 315 by opening the electric accessory 315b, and enter the game ball into the second operating port 315 by closing the electric accessory 315b. The ball is restricted.

  Further, the variable winning a prize opening 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 316b for switching whether or not there is a restriction of entering a game ball into the variable winning a prize opening 316. The opening/closing door 316b is opened/closed by a driving unit such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the opening and closing door 316b allows the game ball to enter the variable winning port 316, and the opening and closing door 316b closes to restrict the entering of the game ball into the variable winning port 316. It

  In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the first operation opening 314 or the second operation opening 315 is detected by the entry sensor 314a or the entry sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 carries out a big hit lottery. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display unit 37 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. In addition, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the incoming ball sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when entering the first operating opening 314 or the second operating opening 315 is 3, and entering the variable winning opening 316. The number of prize balls in the case of doing is 13. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a big hit, it shifts to a big hit game state (special game state) and the variable winning a prize port 316 is opened. ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times and 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

  In addition, when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315, the big hit lottery is executed. Then, when the lottery result is a winning result, a predetermined jackpot gaming state, which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, is entered. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state), and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot gaming state is a round game (unit game) that is performed five times until the predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number or more of game balls are won in the variable winning port 316, and a round game (unit game) is performed five times. It is a game state including modes. The 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state is a gaming state that includes an open/close execution mode in which a round game (unit game) is performed 16 times, and it is expected that a larger amount of prize balls will be paid out than in the 5R jackpot gaming state, rather than in the 5R jackpot gaming state. This is a game state that is advantageous to the player.

  The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display portion 341 such as a liquid crystal display that is visibly arranged through an opening 31A formed in a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, a symbol variation display and a variation game according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 according to the entry into the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315. Various displays such as effect display are performed. The symbol display unit 341 is an example of the image display unit of the present invention, and constitutes the effect production unit of the present invention. Further, the symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display. Furthermore, it is possible to provide one or a plurality of sub-displays separately from the symbol display 341. The sub display unit is arranged, for example, on the upper or lower portion of the symbol display unit 341, or on the left or right portion. The sub display unit may be movable between a position that covers the symbol display unit 341 and a position that does not cover the symbol display unit 341. Further, the sub display unit may be arranged on the upper plate 23. The sub-display unit may constitute the image display means of the present invention alone or together with the symbol display unit 341.

  For example, the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols with numbers “1” to “9” in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like. Note that other characters or sub-designs such as designs may be displayed between the main designs. Further, in the present embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and the types of main symbols are 9 types of "1" to "9".

  In the gaming machine 10, in the variation game, after the variation display time set in advance from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols is stopped. . More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols are varied along a preset variation direction (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the variation of the plurality of main symbols is stopped in order. Then, when the variation of the main symbols in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time has elapsed, the symbol variation display ends.

  When the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 ends, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which the main symbols are lined up on one or more active lines. At this time, the stopped state of the main symbol will clearly or suggest the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot" or "5R regular jackpot", the state where the main symbols of the same symbol are lined up on the activated line is displayed and it is clearly a jackpot. To be done. Further, the jackpot type may be clearly indicated by a combination of main symbols on the activated line, but it is not always explicitly indicated. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", a symbol combination indicating 16R probability variation jackpot among the main symbols is set, for example, a symbol combination of "777" is lined up on the activated line. Is displayed, or a state in which combinations of the same symbols other than “777” are lined up on the activated line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "5R certainty variation jackpot", the state in which the symbol combinations such as "333" which are set in advance as the symbol combinations showing the 5R certainty variation jackpot are displayed in the activated line are displayed. Or, a state in which the combinations of the same symbols other than the combinations of the symbols indicating the 16R certainty variation jackpot or the 5R certainty variation jackpot such as “777” and “333” are arranged on the activated line is displayed. If the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", it is set as a symbol combination indicating a regular jackpot in advance in the main symbols, for example, a combination other than a symbol indicating a probability jackpot such as "222" or "444". The state where the same combination of symbols is lined up on the activated line is displayed. If the lottery result is “out”, a state in which a combination of different main symbols is lined up on the activated line (for example, “323” or “723”) is displayed.

  Further, in the symbol display portion 341, along with the variable display of the main symbol in the variable game, a variable game effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is displayed. When the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", when the state where the jackpot symbol combinations other than the main symbol combination showing the 16R probability variable jackpot are lined up on the activated line is displayed, the 5R probability variable jackpot as the variable game effect. Alternatively, a suggestion effect suggesting that it is a 5R normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is the 16R probability variation jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the state where the jackpot pattern combination other than the main symbol combination showing the probability variation jackpot is lined up on the activated line when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the 5R normal jackpot is displayed as the variation game effect. A suggestive production that suggests that is performed is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is the 5R certainty variation jackpot is executed.

  Furthermore, when the game state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, the symbol display portion 341 displays a jackpot gaming effect including an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect.

  The magnet sensor 35 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 around the first operating port 314. The magnet sensor 35 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the magnet sensor 35 is input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect an illegal act when an attempt is made to illegally guide the game ball to the first operation opening 314 using the magnet. The magnet sensor 35 may be provided around the variable winning port 316. Accordingly, in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game, when an act of winning a game ball that greatly exceeds the upper limit number in the variable winning port 316 is performed, it is possible to detect the illegal act.

  The radio wave sensor 36 is provided around the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315, and is provided on the back side of the game board 31. The radio wave sensor 36 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor 36 is input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect an illegal act when an electric wave is illegally input to the incoming ball sensors 314a and 315a to falsely detect the entering of a game ball. The radio wave sensor 36 can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example.

  The main display unit 37 includes an LED pair 371, two 7-segment displays 372 and 373, and an LED group 374 arranged in the upper right part of the game board 31. The LED pair 371 displays the result of the lottery as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b in the main control unit 331 as a trigger (triggered by winning through the through gate 317) by a combination of lighting and extinguishing (lighting pattern). On the 7-segment display 372, the variable display of the symbol is performed with the winning of the first operation opening 314 as a trigger, and the symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. On the 7-segment display 373, the variable display of the symbol is performed with the winning of the second operation opening 315 as a trigger, and the symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the LED group 374, the number N of reservations and the number M of reservations of the variable display generated by winning the prize in the first operation opening 314 and the second operation opening 315 are displayed by a plurality of LED lighting patterns.

  Whether or not the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are touch-operated by the player's operation in a predetermined region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, for example, a specific region corresponding to the predetermined region on the panel 25, is determined by the player. It is to detect whether. Further, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are not limited to the player's touch operation on a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display section 341, and the hand is placed on the front side of the symbol display section 341, etc. The player may be able to detect the action of the player. As shown in FIGS. 4 to 7, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d include an upper left detection sensor 38a, a lower left detection sensor 38b, an upper right detection sensor 38c, and a lower right detection sensor 38d. Each of the detection sensors 38a to 38d is, for example, an optical sensor. The optical sensor may be either a reflective sensor or a transmissive sensor, but a diffuse reflective sensor is preferably used. When a reflective sensor is used as each of the detection sensors 38a to 38d, for example, the presence of an object within the detection range is detected based on a change in the amount of reflected light received.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6(A), the upper left detection sensor 38a is arranged in the upper left portion of the peripheral portion of the symbol display portion 341 or in the vicinity thereof, and the lower left detection sensor 38b is the lower left portion of the peripheral portion of the symbol display portion 341. Alternatively, the upper right detection sensor 38c is arranged in the upper right portion of the peripheral portion of the symbol display portion 341 or in the vicinity thereof, and the lower right detection sensor 38d is arranged in the lower right portion of the peripheral portion of the symbol display portion 341 or its vicinity. It is arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d have different ranges in which the presence of an object can be detected. When it is determined that an object is present on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 when the object is detected by at least one of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, crosshatching is performed in FIG. 6(B). It is possible to detect the presence of an object on the front side of substantially the entire area of the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, when it is determined that the object exists on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 when the object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the symbol cross-hatched in FIG. 6C. The presence of an object on the front side of the central area of the display unit 341 can be detected.

  When determining whether or not an object exists on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, the object is detected by at least one of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d from the width of the detection range of the object. It is preferable to judge that an object exists on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 when is detected. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 provided with so-called warp, two or more detection sensors 38a to 38d are provided in order to prevent erroneous detection that a player has performed a touch operation by a game ball that has passed through the warp. It is preferable to judge that an object exists on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 on the condition that the existence of the object is detected by. Even when the movable accessory member 39 is exposed from the opening 31A and covers the upper portion of the symbol display portion 341 at the standby position as in the present embodiment, the two or more detection sensors 38a to 38d detect the object. It is preferable to judge that an object exists on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 on condition that the existence is detected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when an object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, it is determined that the object exists on the front side of the symbol display unit 341.

  Of course, when at least one of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d detects an object, it may be determined that the object exists on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Further, when the movable accessory member 39 is present at the standby position, the presence of an object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, while when a specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. The presence of an object may be detected by some of the sensors. For example, when the movable accessory member 39 is at the standby position, the presence of an object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, and the movable accessory member 39 is at a position different from the standby position (the operating position or the standby position). The presence of an object may be detected by some of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d when the object is present at an intermediate position with respect to the operating position. Further, when some of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are out of order, the presence of an object may be detected by the remaining detection sensors that are not out of order. In the operation check of the movable accessory member 39 when the power is turned on, each of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d individually determines whether or not the movable accessory member 39 is in the operation position, thereby detecting each sensor. It is possible to check whether or not 38a to 38d are out of order. Also, the operation chuck as to whether or not each of the detection sensors 38a to 38d is out of order can be performed during the progress of the game. For example, when the movable accessory member 39 is moved to the operating position, it is determined whether or not an object is present based on the detection result of one of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. It is also possible to perform an operation check as to whether or not each of the detection sensors 38a to 38d is normally operated by sequentially determining each of the to 38d.

  Further, each of the detection sensors 38a to 38d is not limited to the periphery of the symbol display portion 341, but may be arranged in the peripheral portion of the symbol display portion 341 or the like. Further, the number of detection sensors may be one or more, and the number is not limited to four and may be another number.

  The movable accessory member 39 is located between a predetermined standby position (see FIG. 4) located above the symbol display portion 341 and an operating position (see FIG. 5) set below the standby position. It is possible to move vertically along the surface of the symbol display portion 341. The operating position (see FIG. 5) is closer to the center of the symbol display portion 341 than the standby position (see FIG. 4). Further, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position (see FIG. 5), the coverage of the surface of the symbol display portion 341 is higher than that in the standby position (see FIG. 4). The movable accessory member 39 has a plurality of lamps 391 arranged in an annular shape on the periphery thereof. In this embodiment, 15 lamps 391 are arranged, and each lamp 391 can be individually turned on and off. Further, each of the plurality of lamps 391 can be turned on in a plurality of colors including, for example, white, yellow, green, red, or a mixed color thereof. In this way, each lamp 391 can be turned on and off individually and can be turned on in a plurality of colors. For example, when the movable accessory member 39 is operated, the lighting pattern, the lighting color of each lamp 391, Depending on the number of lights, it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation degree of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the variation game, or to clearly indicate the lottery result. For example, regarding the lighting color, the jackpot expectation can be increased in the order of white, yellow, green, and red, and the rainbow lamp effect is executed by appropriately setting the lighting pattern and the lighting color. By doing so, it is possible to execute a finalized effect that clearly shows that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the movable accessory member 39 is exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position, but the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit by using the lamp 391 in the portion exposed from the opening 31A. It is also conceivable to perform an effect that indicates the degree of expectation. For example, in the present embodiment, since the four lamps 391 located on the lower side are exposed from the opening 31A (see FIG. 4), the jackpot expectation depends on which of the lamps 391 is lit. It is possible to suggest the degree. Further, in addition to the four lamps 391 located on the lower side, it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation degree by an image displayed on the symbol display portion 341 (see FIG. 26C described later).

  The movable accessory member 39 may be wholly hidden without being exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position. Further, the gaming machine 10 may include a plurality of movable accessory members 39. Furthermore, the movable accessory member 39 may be a combination of a plurality of separated movable members, a member that can be deformed into two or more forms, or a display such as a liquid crystal display device. Of course, the movable accessory member 39 is not limited to cover a part of the display screen of the symbol display portion 341, and may cover the entire display screen. In addition, the central portion of the movable accessory member 39 may be configured as an illumination portion that can be turned on and off. In this case, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation degree or clearly shows the jackpot by lighting or blinking the illumination portion (see FIG. 26D described later).

  Such a movable accessory member 39 is controlled so as to operate in an effect for showing a lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the variable game. In particular, the movable accessory member 39 is operated as a confirmation effect indicating that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, and is also operated as a chance up effect for improving the expectation that the lottery result is a big hit. Often. In addition, in the jackpot game, the movable accessory member 39 is used for the jackpot game in addition to the promotion effect that clearly shows that the actual lottery result is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result suggested in the variation game effect. It is also possible to operate it as a holding condominium confirmation effect that informs that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is included in the held games in which the execution of the variable game is held.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the gaming machine 10 includes a motor 39a that supplies a driving force to the movable accessory member 39, and a return detector 39b for detecting that the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position. Have. The motor 39a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, or the like, and the return detection unit 39b is an optical sensor, a contact sensor, or the like. The movable accessory member 39 and the motor 39a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and the movable accessory member 39 is directed from the standby position to the operating position in accordance with the rotation direction of the motor 39a. And downward, or upward from the operating position to the standby position. For example, the movable accessory member 39 is moved from the standby position to the operating position when the motor 39a is rotated in the forward direction, and conversely, is moved from the operating position to the standby position when the motor 39a is rotated in the reverse direction. Moved to a position.

  The gaming machine 10 also includes a motor driver 39c to which the motor 39a and the return detection unit 39b are connected. The motor driver 39c is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. Then, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a in accordance with a control instruction from the voice lamp control device 5. Further, the motor driver 39c can acquire the detection result of the return detection unit 39b and transmit it to the voice lamp control device 5. The motor 39a and the return detection unit 39b may be directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5 and controlled by the voice lamp control device 5.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

  The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls of the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a firing control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of payouts of game balls by the payout device 132 and the like. The firing control device 8 controls the game ball firing mechanism 32 according to the operation of the firing handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts electric power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the electric power to a control device and a driving means provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of a game in the gaming machine 10. The main controller 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main controller 4 is equipped with an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and the like. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer and is an example of the main control means of the present invention. Further, the MPU 41 has a ROM 411 and a RAM 412 built therein. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the main controller 4 and outputs a control signal from the main controller 4. Further, the input/output I/F 42 is connected with ball entrance sensors 313a to 317a, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, a main display unit 37, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a ball entering the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the through gate 317 based on the detection signals from the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a. To judge. In addition, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is an illegal act using a magnet or a radio wave based on the detection signals from the magnet sensor 35 and the radio wave sensor 36. Further, the input/output I/F 42 is connected with a voice lamp control device 5, a payout control device 7, a firing control device 8, a power supply control device 9, and the like.

  Then, the MPU 41 outputs commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command to the voice lamp control device 5.

  The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it includes information on the jackpot type. The variation pattern command is based on the information stored in the pending storage area 412b described later when starting the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 and the main display unit 37, and in step S1605 in the variation start process of FIG. Is set in. The fluctuation pattern command may be a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of only the fluctuation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

  The first hold command and the second hold command, when the number N of reservations or the number M of reservations stored in the later-described holding storage area 412b increases, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold, the variation pattern, and This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number N of holdings or the number M of holdings. The first hold command and the second hold command are set based on information stored in a hold storage area 412b described later when the hold number N or the hold number M is increased (the first hold command in FIG. 12). Step S1207 or step S1209 of the hold command setting process).

  The shift command indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 or the first holding area RB1 to the fourth holding area RB4 when the holding number N or the holding number M decreases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the hit/miss information has been shifted. The shift command is set in step S1512 in the data setting process of FIG.

  Although commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, their description will be omitted.

  Further, the main controller 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit and a frequency dividing circuit as a means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs the clock signal to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of a main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

  In the present embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency divider circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 causes the main timer interrupt (to be described later) every time the clock signal rises (or falls). It is assumed that the embedded processing is started and executed. The oscillating circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as needed, and supply an operation clock of the control main body in the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

  The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various kinds of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 and the like. The RAM 412 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

  Here, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery or the like will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the holding storage area 412b, and the electric power combination holding area 412c of the RAM 412 to perform the jackpot lottery and the setting of the variable display time.

  The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used in the jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used in determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used in determining the outlying type. included. In addition, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a variation type counter CS1 that determines a variation display time in the main display portion 37 and the symbol display portion 341. Be done. Further, in the lottery counter 412a, an ordinary hit random number counter C4 used in a lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second operation port 315 is placed in the electric outlet open state, and an initial value setting of the ordinary hit random number counter C4. A normal hit initial value counter CIN2 used for Hereinafter, in the case of collectively describing these plural types of counters, they are simply referred to as counters.

  The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short intervals and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 and are referred to by the MPU 41 when the jackpot lottery and the variable display time are set.

  The reserved storage area 412b includes a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reserved storage area REA, and the type of variable game that the 7-segment display 372 displays in a variable and stopped manner may be referred to as a first special symbol game. is there. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reserved storage area REB, and the type of variable game that the 7-segment display 373 variably displays and stops may be referred to as a second special symbol game. is there.

  When a game ball enters the first operating port 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as win/fail information used in the lottery, and is stored in any of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first holding storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second operation port 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as win/fail information used in the lottery, and is stored in any of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB. The acquisition processing of the hit/miss information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as the determination unit of the present invention by executing the processing according to the control program. In addition, the lottery counters 412a (such as the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1) are individually associated with the first reserved storage area REA and the second reserved storage area REB. May be provided.

  Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 has the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA of the first holding storage area REA. It is stored in any of the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the REA4 and the second reserve storage area REB.

  Therefore, the execution is performed based on the hit/fail information stored in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first holding storage area REA and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB. In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game that is performed, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the first operating port 314, the winning/discarding information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, the third holding area REA3, and the fourth holding area REA4. Stored in the area. In the number-of-holds storage area NAA, the number of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 in which the hit/miss information is stored is stored as the number of holding N.

  Further, when a game ball enters the second operating port 315, the hit/miss information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4. It is stored in the area. In the number-of-holds storage area NAB, the number of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 in which the hit/miss information is stored is stored as the number of holdings M.

  That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first operation port 314 is composed of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4, and a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum reservation numbers of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4. And, it is possible to hold up to four pieces of winning/losing information as the winning history of the game balls to the second operating port 315, respectively.

  It should be noted that it is conceivable as another embodiment that a holding area having a maximum holding number of 8 is provided in common to the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315. It is possible to suspend the winning/losing information as the winning history. The storage process of the hit/miss information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing the process according to the control program.

  The execution area AE is the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA or the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB when the symbol variation display on the main display portion 37 and the symbol display portion 341 is started. This is a storage area used to move the hit/miss information stored in. Specifically, the hit/fail information of the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and the hit/fail information does not exist in the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB. When the number of reserved storage areas NAB is 0, the hit/fail information of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

  The difference between the number M of reservations stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA of the first holding storage area REA and the number N of holdings stored in the number-of-holding storage area NAB of the second holding storage area REB is 2 or more. In such a case, the value of the holding area having the larger number may be preferentially moved to the execution area AE as another embodiment. It is also conceivable as another embodiment that the hit/miss information of the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA and the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery or the like on the basis of the numerical value information stored in the execution area AE as the win/loss information at the start of one variation game. At this time, when the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the hit/fail information stored in the second holding area REA2 is shifted to the first holding area REA1, The hit/fail information stored in the hold area REA3 shifts to the second hold area REA2, and the hit/fail information stored in the fourth hold area REA4 shifts to the third hold area REA3.

  Similarly, when the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the hit/fail information stored in the second holding area REB2 is shifted to the first holding area REB1, and the third holding area REB1 is held. The hit/fail information stored in the area REB3 shifts to the second holding area REB2, and the hit/fail information stored in the fourth holding area REB4 shifts to the third holding area REB3.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 637, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the big hit random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 314 or the second operating opening 315.

  The value of the random number to be a big hit is determined by the win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area in the ROM 411, that is, the low probability mode (the first notification game state) that is the normal game state and the high probability mode (the second probability game state) that is the probability variation game state. Two types are set according to the information game state). Here, FIG. 9(A) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode hit/loss table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 9(B) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability mode hit/miss table corresponding to the high probability mode. In the example shown in FIG. 9(A) and FIG. 9(B), the number of random number values for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery in the low probability mode is a big hit is two (0, 1) of random number values 0 to 637. In the high probability mode, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 20 (0 to 19) of the random number values 0 to 637. That is, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is 1/319 (2/638), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability mode is 1/31.9 (20/638), which is 10 times that in the low-probability mode.

  Here, in the low-probability mode hit/miss table and the high-probability mode hit/miss table, two random numbers (0, 1) that result in a lottery in the big hit lottery are common, but it is also possible that they are not common. Further, the random numbers to be won as a jackpot may not be continuous values but may be partially or wholly discrete values. In addition, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number value for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is missed.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 19 and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated, and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 314 or the second operating opening 315. In the gaming machine 10, the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area in the ROM 411 sets the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpot types, the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot. Here, FIG. 9C is a diagram showing an example of the distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 9(C), when the type of the variation game is the first special symbol game, the number of random numbers that are 5R probability variation jackpots is 10 from 0 to 9, and the number of random numbers that are 16R probability variation jackpots. Is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that is a 5R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, if the type of variable game is the second special symbol game, the number of random numbers that are 5R certainty jackpots is 0 to 5, and the number of random numbers that is 16R certainty jackpots is 5 to 14 Yes, the number of random numbers that is a 5R normal jackpot is 15 to 19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop certainty machine, which has the same probability of a certainty variation jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the 16R probability variation jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than that of the first special symbol. That is, in the probability variation short time game state, compared to the normal game state such as the normal time saving game state and the normal non-time saving game state, the expected value of the game ball is set to be high when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit. ing.

  In the present embodiment, the first operating port 314 that triggers the first special symbol game by winning the game ball, and the second operating port that triggers the second special symbol game by winning the game ball. The individual distribution table is set for each 315, the distribution probability of the jackpot type is different depending on which of the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315 the game ball wins, but the first special symbol It is also possible that the jackpot type distribution probability is the same in the game and the second special symbol game. Further, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the loop probability variation machine, and it is conceivable that the gaming machine 10 is configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a one-two mixing machine, or the like.

  Then, the MPU 41, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot", "5R normal jackpot". It is determined whether it is a "big hit" or "out."

  Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R certainty variation jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot, the opening/closing execution mode in which the round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened in the jackpot game is repeated five times is executed. If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 16R probability variation jackpot, the opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game is executed.

  In the case of 5R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit, it shifts to the probability variation short-time mode which is a high probability mode with a high jackpot winning probability and a high frequency support mode with a high opening probability of the electric auditors 315b after the jackpot game is over. Then, the probability variation short-time mode continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R probability variation jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot”, or “5R normal jackpot”.

  On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, it is executed in the normal time saving mode which is the low probability mode in which the winning probability of the jackpot is low after the jackpot game is over and the high frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is high. Then, the high frequency support mode in the normal time saving mode is continued until the jackpot lottery for a predetermined number of times such as 50 times and 100 times is completed.

  By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability variation machine, a jackpot lottery of a preset number (for example, 50 times or 100 times) after the jackpot game at the probability variation jackpot is finished. Is executed in the probability variable short-time mode (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode), then shifts to the low-probability mode, and the high-frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is also conceivable as another embodiment to perform the falling lottery from the probability variation short-time mode to the normal time-shortening mode or the low probability mode in the variable game. In addition, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is out, the big hit game state and the high frequency support mode are not shifted. In the present embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpot types of 5R certainty variation jackpot, 16R certainty variation jackpot and 5R normal jackpot is described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, two-round certainty variation jackpot 2 It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round jackpot, 16R jackpot.

  In addition, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 314 or the second operating opening 315.

  In the game machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of the stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display portion 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of alignment. Specifically, by the detachment type table stored in the detachment type table storage area in the ROM 411, a front-rear detachment reach in which the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and a reach also occurs After that, the value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of the three types of out-of-bounds, ie, the out-of-front and out-of-reach, in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, and the out-of-reach does not occur is set. Here, FIG. 9D is a diagram showing an example of the disconnection type table. In the example shown in FIG. 9D, the value of the random number that is the out-of-position reach is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that is the reach other than the out-of-position is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that is completely out of reach is 39. ~238. Note that the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the variable game that wins the 5R certainty variation jackpot, the 16R certainty variation jackpot, or the 5R regular jackpot, that is, the variation game that shifts to the open/close execution mode.

  Here, the reach indicates a state in which it is likely to be a symbol combination of the main symbols indicating that the jackpot has been won, from the start of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display unit 341 to the stop display of the symbols. It is a fluctuation state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two stop positions among the three stop positions on the activated line in the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position is in a changed state. Further, during the reach variation state in the symbol display unit 341, a story effect process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, an operation of the operation button 20 by the player, or a specific area of the panel 25 is performed. A player participation type operation effect process in which the touch operation is reflected in the effect is executed. During execution of these effect processes, the variable display in the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden or may be reduced or enlarged and displayed.

  For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric duty holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric power holding area 412c to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time. For example, if the electric accessory release counter C4 is 0 to 199, it is considered a win, and if the electric accessory release counter C4 is 200 to 250, it is considered to be a win.

  The variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. In this way, by determining the variation pattern type, in the voice lamp control device 5, high-speed variation production (basic production, non-reach production), normal reach production (first development production), super reach production (second development production). ), a rough variation game effect type such as a special reach effect (second development effect) is determined according to a change pattern type (fluctuation display time). The fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the MPU 41 executes a main process described later, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 314 or the second operating opening 315.

  Then, the MPU 41 determines the variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and the preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of the variation pattern while referring to the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, or the deviation variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. It should be noted that these fluctuation tables may be provided individually for the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. Further, the probability variation big hit variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variation big hit and the 16R probability variation big hit.

  Here, FIG. 9(E), FIG. 9(F), and FIG. 9(G) are diagrams showing an example of a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variation jackpot variation table, and a deviation variation table. As shown in FIGS. 9(E), 9(F), and 9(G), in the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, and the out-of-range variation table, variation patterns are set in advance according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. It is associated. Then, the MPU 41, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R regular jackpot”, the regular jackpot variation table, and when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot” or “16R probability variation jackpot”, the probability variation jackpot variation table, lottery When the result is “out”, the out variation table is referenced to identify the type of variation pattern.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 9(E) and FIG. 9(F), in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, variation patterns “01” to “03” according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Is selected. Here, when the variation pattern “01” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the normal reach production pattern having the variation display time of 30 s as the variation type (effect pattern type) (see FIG. 24(B)). The normal reach effect pattern is executed in the symbol display portion 341. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect (see FIG. 27). When the variation pattern “02” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the super reach production pattern having the variation display time of 60 s as the variation type (effect pattern type) (see FIG. 24(B)). The super reach effect pattern is executed in the symbol display portion 341. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the super reach effect (see FIG. 27). Further, when the variation pattern “03” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the special reach production pattern having the longest variation display time of 90 s as the variation type (effect pattern type) (see FIG. 24(B)). ), the special reach effect pattern is executed in the symbol display portion 341. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the special reach effect (see FIG. 27).

  As shown in FIG. 9(G), in the deviation variation table, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is determined for each stop type at the time of deviation (front/rear deviation, reach other than front/rear, complete deviation) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. Correspondence between the and fluctuation patterns is defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of disengagement is the front/rear outreach or the reach other than the front/rear outreach, one of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of disengagement is complete disengagement, either the fluctuation pattern “04” or “05” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern “04” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the reach-less effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) having the variable display time of 7 s as the change type (effect pattern type) (FIG. 24). (See (B)), the non-reach effect pattern is executed in the symbol display portion 341 (see FIG. 27). When the variation pattern “05” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a reach-less effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) having a variable display time of 10 s as a change type (effect pattern type) (FIG. 24). (See (B)), the non-reach effect pattern is executed in the symbol display portion 341 (see FIG. 27).

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, the variable display corresponding to the variation pattern “04” is displayed as a variation display at the time of the deviation, and the variation display of the deviation pattern is stopped without a notice effect such as a character or a message being displayed, and the variation display of the deviation pattern is stopped. Is executed. Further, in the gaming machine 10, as the variable display at the time of deviation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "05", the variable display is disengaged with a notice effect such as a character, a message, etc. displayed, and the dislocation pattern of the disengagement pattern is stopped. Executed. Further, when the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern “05”, the player participation type operation effect in which the operation of the touch operation on the specific area of the operation button 20 or the panel 25 by the player is reflected is announced. It may be executed as a performance.

  The types of fluctuation patterns are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 9(E) to 9(G). Further, the probability variation big hit variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variation big hit and the 16R probability variation big hit.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects different in character, story, etc. are prepared as the normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “01”, and any one of them is selected. The normal reach production is executed.

  Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, as the super reach effect executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “02”, a plurality of types of super reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared, and selected from them. One of the performed super reach effects is executed. Super reach production is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time than normal reach production, and the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit (expectation degree) is higher than the normal reach production, and the jackpot is won rather than the special reach production. It is executed when the player is suggested that the probability (degree of expectation) is low.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, as the special reach effects executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “03”, a plurality of types of special reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared, and selected from them. One of the special reach productions performed is executed. The special reach effect is a reach effect whose variation time is longer than that of the normal reach effect, and is an effect which develops from the normal reach effect or the super reach effect, for example. The special reach effect is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expected degree) of jackpot winning is higher than the normal reach effect and the special reach effect.

  In the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern, an operation effect in which the operation situation of a touch operation by the player with respect to a specific area of the operation button 20 or the panel 25 is reflected in the effect, for example, a single-shot operation in which a single-shot operation is reflected in the effect. A player participation type operation effect such as a performance, a continuous hit operation effect in which a player repeatedly hits the operation button 20 is reflected in the effect, and a long press operation effect in which a long press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect. May be included.

  Then, when the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time by the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 41 issues a fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Input to the voice lamp controller 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds a variable pattern command “A” indicating that the 5R normal jackpot is in front of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03”. Any one of "A01" to "A03" is output. Further, when the lottery result is “5R certainty variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 changes pattern command “B01” with “B” indicating that it is the 5R certainty variation jackpot in front of the variation patterns “01” to “03”. ~ Any one of "B03" is output. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability variable jackpot”, the MPU 41 changes pattern command “C01” with “C” indicating that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03”. ~ Any one of "C03" is output. Further, when the lottery result is “miss”, the MPU 41 changes pattern commands “D01” to “D05” with “D” indicating that the change is before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “05”. Will be output. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command, and the symbol display unit 341 based on the variation pattern and the lottery result. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in are determined. Then, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform variable display based on the details of the determined variation mode, reproduces voice from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and turns on and blinks the illumination section 27. , Turn it off.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process of determining a variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table for the variation display on the symbol display unit 341. It will be. Therefore, even when the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the jackpot lottery can be stably executed by the MPU 41. Further, since details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the voice lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute various variation modes as the variation mode.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 7, the sub control unit 332 includes a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331, a symbol variation display and a symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341. Perform performance display.

[Voice lamp controller 5]
The voice lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input/output I/F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 has a ROM 511 and a RAM 512 built therein.

  The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. In addition, the ROM 511 also stores information such as a voice used in a variable game effect, a jackpot game effect, and a lamp blinking pattern. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various kinds of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

  The voice lamp control device 5 executes a process in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, so that the display control device 6 receives a command based on a command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (Control signal) is input to control the display of the symbol display unit 341. In addition, the voice lamp control device 5 also controls the output of the reproduced voice from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination portion 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display portion 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the output of the reproduced sound from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 when executing a variation game effect and a jackpot game effect described later.

  The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main controller 4 and the display controller 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Then, commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main controller 4 to the voice lamp controller 5. The voice lamp control device 5 also outputs a display variation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the voice lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. Further, a configuration in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having the functions of both the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

  Further, the speaker 26, the illumination portion 27, and the motor driver 39c are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Then, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the voice output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination portion 27, and the like based on the command input from the main control device 4. Further, the MPU 51 can control the motor 39a via the motor driver 39c to operate the movable accessory member 39 (see FIGS. 4 and 5), and obtain the detection result by the return detection unit 39b. It is possible to determine whether or not the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position. Further, the operation switch 20a, the upper left detection sensor 38a, the lower left detection sensor 38b, the upper right detection sensor 38c, and the lower right detection sensor 38d are connected to the input/output I/F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated and that the touch operation has been performed on the specific area of the panel 25, and based on the detection result thereof, the symbol display unit. It is also possible to control the image game effect executed in 341, the operation effect of the movable accessory member 39, the sound output effect in which a sound is output from the speaker 26, the lamp effect in the blinking mode of the illumination portion 27, and the like.

  The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main controller 4.

  Specifically, the MPU 51, when the fluctuation pattern command is input, the fluctuation pattern (stop symbol combination of main symbols, fluctuation display time, fluctuation type (see FIG. 24(B))) based on the fluctuation pattern command, and An effect type (see FIGS. 25A to 25C) is determined, and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2203 in the command determination process in FIG. 23). (Refer to S2207), and the symbol variable display in the symbol display portion 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display portion 341, when the variation pattern command indicates a deviation, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the deviation is displayed. On the other hand, when the variation pattern command indicates the 5R normal jackpot, the combination of main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot is displayed, and when the 5R probability variation jackpot is displayed, the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the 5R regular jackpot or the 5R probability variation jackpot. Is displayed, and if the 16R probability variation jackpot is shown, the 5R regular jackpot is

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the command (control signal) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the voice lamp control device 5.

  The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62, and the input/output I/F 62 is connected to the voice lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341. The voice lamp controller 5 and the display controller 6 may be capable of bidirectional communication.

  The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 has a ROM 611 and a RAM 612 built therein. The display control device 6 also incorporates other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting an interrupt. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  In the ROM 611, in addition to the control program, a variable symbol such as a main symbol used in the symbol variable display of the symbol display unit 341, a notice effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, a deviation effect image, a touch operation acceptance effect image, and a touch. A plurality of types of images such as operation effect images are stored. The images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 include still images and moving images. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the variable display time of the variable symbol in addition to the type of image to be used and the display timing. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays an image on the symbol display unit 341 in accordance with the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, whereby the symbol variable display and the effect display are realized.

  The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various kinds of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for the processing executed by the MPU 61. The RAM 612 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 has a ROM 711 and a RAM 712 built therein.

  The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

  The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input/output I/F 72.

  As described above, the payout device 132 is for paying out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stopping member that switches whether or not the game balls are paid out, It is provided with a payout sensor 132b for individually detecting the game balls to be paid out. The payout controller 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b. Further, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state restoration switch 73 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging of the dispensing device 132 occurs.

  The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the game machine 10. Then, the ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 according to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided in the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount of money within the range of the amount of money to be lent to the player. Specifically, a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, whereby the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 so that a predetermined number of game balls are obtained. Be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the cash by inserting the cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The firing control device 8 includes a firing control IC 81 that controls driving of the game ball firing mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball launching mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, thereby launching the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 to the launch rail 321. Let it feed on. Then, the firing control IC 81 detects the operation amount of the firing handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball firing mechanism 32 according to the operation amount to direct the game ball on the launch rail 321 to the game board 31. To fire. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 by using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, one gaming ball is shot toward the gaming area every 0.6 seconds.

  Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the rotational operation amount of the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22. Thereby, the firing control IC 81, based on the voltage value input according to the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22, as the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22 increases, the firing intensity of the game ball from the game ball firing mechanism 32 increases. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted to be strong.

  Further, the launch handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for allowing the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The firing control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stopping switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the firing handle 22 with the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stopping switch 21b is operated by the player. When it is detected, the game ball launching mechanism 32 stops the launch of the game ball. Thereby, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a rotated state, and a game in a situation where the player is not touching the firing handle 22 is prevented. Further, the player can stop the firing of the ball game ball by rotating the firing handle 22 and operating the ball stop switch 21b with a thumb or the like at an arbitrary timing.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates +12V voltage for driving various sensors, driving units, etc., +5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12 V or +5 V to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, and the like.

  The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on/off the power of the gaming machine 10, and a RAM erasing switch 91 that is operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power is turned on by operating the power switch 90 while the RAM erasing switch 91 is ON.

  Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as a charging unit that is charged by the electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is retained for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period by the electric power discharged from the secondary battery.

  Further, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like when it determines that the power supply is cut off. For example, the power supply control device 9 is in a power failure state when the preset DC voltage of 24V is output based on the electric power supplied from the power supply equipment and when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. To judge. When the main controller 4, the voice lamp controller 5, the payout controller 7, and the like receive the power failure signal from the power controller 9, the control being executed is interrupted and a predetermined NMI interrupt process is executed.

[Process of main controller 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is started up when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, and a power outage. NMI interrupt processing etc. are executed. In the present embodiment, description of the startup process, NMI interrupt process, etc. will be omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described.

[Main timer interrupt process of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes sensor detection processing for determining the detection state of the sensor or switch connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the ball entrance sensors 313a to 317a, the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, etc. are determined. At this time, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information when the entry of the game ball into any of the entry sensors 313a to 317a is detected.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4, and those counter values have reached the maximum value. In that case, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes the start winning process associated with the winning of the game ball into the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 (step S1004), and executes the firing control process (step S1005). The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the launch control process, the game ball is provided on condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player touches the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. Is a process to enable the launch of. Further, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is a process to do. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch a game ball when the launch of the game ball is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 performs a lottery based on the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the electric power holding area 412c to determine whether or not to set the electric accessory 315b of the second operating port 315 to the electric power open state. Execute the process. Specifically, in the through gate process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency mode flag. Then, the MPU 41, when not in the high-frequency support mode, determines that the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, and determines that it is a normal symbol winning, and the normal winning random number counter C4 is 30 to 249, and is out. It is determined that Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and determines that it is a normal symbol winning, and the normal winning random number counter C4 is 200 to 249, and is out. It is determined that When the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won in the through-gate process, the electric accessory 315b is opened only for a predetermined time. Thereby, it becomes possible to win the game ball to the second operation port 315 on the upper right of the game board 31 on which the electric accessory 315b is arranged.

[Starting prize processing]
Here, with reference to FIG. 11, a start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of FIG. 10 will be described.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has won in the first operating port 314. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the first operating port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined that the game ball has not won the first operating port 314. Then (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the number N of reservations stored in the number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reservations (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number N of reservations is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1106. On the other hand, if the number N of reservations is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number N of reservations (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of FIG. 10, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. 13), which is updated in the main processing described later. And S1310) and stores the counter value in the first free holding area of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first holding storage area REA of the holding storage area 412b in the RAM 412. ..

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 determines the content of the win/loss information before the win/non-play information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 becomes a jackpot judgment target in a variation start process (S1408 of FIG. 14, FIG. 16) described later. The first hold command setting process of setting the first hold command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result is executed. The details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has won in the second operating port 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the second operating port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and it is determined that the game ball has not won the second operating port 315. Then, (step S1106: No), the start winning process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S1005 of FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether the reservation number M stored in the reservation number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum reservation number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number M of reservations is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the start winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 of FIG. On the other hand, if the number M of reservations is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number M of reservations (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of FIG. 10, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. And S1310), and stores the counter value in the first free holding area of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB of the holding storage area 412b in the RAM 412. ..

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the win/loss information for the second suspension acquired in step S1109 is the target of the jackpot judgment in the variation start process (S1408 of FIG. 14, FIG. 16) described later. The contents are confirmed, and the second suspension command setting process for setting the second suspension command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. Here, the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 12, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the second hold command setting process, if the “first hold command” is replaced with the “second hold command” and the “holding number N” is replaced with the “holding number M” in the first holding command setting process of FIG. Good.

[First pending command setting process]
Here, the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type of the first hold command (big hit type or out), the variation pattern, and the hold number N. ..

<Step S1201>
In step S1201, the MPU 41 reads the number N of reservations from the number storage area NAA of the first holding storage area REA, and also reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first holding from the RAM 412.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether the high probability mode is set. If the high probability mode is set (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203, and if the high probability mode is not set (step S1202). : No), and moves the process to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 is set to ON at the time of transition to the high-probability mode in the game state transition process (step S1306 of FIG. 13) in the main process described later to determine whether or not it is in the high-probability mode, and from the high-probability mode to the jackpot game. It judges based on the high probability mode flag which is set to OFF at the time of shifting to another gaming state such as a state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 corresponds to the jackpot win based on the high-probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 9B). Whether or not is determined is executed. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 corresponds to the jackpot winning, based on the low probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 9A). Whether or not it is judged is executed.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1. When it is determined that the counter value read from the value does not correspond to the jackpot winning (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the hit/miss information is stored in the third holding area RE3 in step S1104 of FIG. 11, the jackpot type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 included in the hit/hold information stored in the third holding area RE3 are counted. The value is read. Note that, among the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, the holding area in which the hit/fail information is stored in step S1104 of FIG. 11 can be determined by the value of the holding number N stored in the holding number storage area NA. is there.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the hold number N in the first hold command. In this way, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp controller 5 which receives the first hold command causes the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 to receive the hold number included in the first hold command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize which of the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 the first holding command corresponds to the hit/miss information.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order, the variation type counter CS1 and the number N of suspensions in the first suspension command (step S1209).

  The first hold command set to be turned on in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed in step S1301 of the main process of FIG. Is erased after being transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 together with the command. Further, the content of the first hold command described here is only an example, and the content is not limited to that described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, some or all of the information of the first hold command may be included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main processing, main control processing for the progress of the variation game and the jackpot game is executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1301 to S1307 is executed as a periodical processing of, for example, a 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S1308 to S1310 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing of steps S1301 to S1307 to the next cycle. It

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transmits an output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 10 or the previous main process to the control device such as the sub control unit 332 or the peripheral control unit 140. Execute the process. For example, when a command such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, or a shift command is set in the RAM 412, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. If a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303, which will be described later, in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, whether or not a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, or the like. Then, if a prize has been generated, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes the variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. Although the details of the variable game control process will be described later, in the variable game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed and the variable pattern command necessary for the symbol variable display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 10, and the fluctuations updated in steps S1302 and S1310 of this processing. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, the MPU 41 controls the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 316b of the round game in which the variable winning a prize port 316 is opened, and the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game (bonus). Execute according to the number of types. For example, the MPU 41 executes the round game 5 times when the jackpot type is the 5R regular jackpot and the 5R certainty variation jackpot, and the round game 16 times when the jackpot type is the 16R certain variation jackpot.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in steps S1602 and S1603 in the variation start process of FIG. In the game state transition processing, the MPU 41 changes the game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, to a jackpot game state having an open/close execution mode, a probability variation short game state that is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a low probability mode and a high frequency. It shifts to a normal short time gaming state which is a support mode, a normal non-short time gaming state which is not a high frequency support mode in a low probability mode.

  For example, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the variable game informing the lottery result. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. Further, when the jackpot game is over, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to a predetermined gaming state in accordance with the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that has triggered the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R certainty variation jackpot or the 16R certainty variation jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts to the probability variation short game state after the jackpot game, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R normal jackpot. When it is, after the jackpot game is over, it is shifted to the normal time short game state.

  Further, when the transition of the gaming state is transitioned, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the gaming state before the transition to OFF, while setting the flag for the gaming state after the transition to ON. For example, the MPU 41 sets the high-probability mode flag to on while setting the big-jack game flag to off when there is a transition of the game state from the jackpot game state to the probability variation short game state. On the other hand, when there is a transition of the gaming state from the probability variation short game state to the jackpot gaming state, the high-probability mode flag is set to OFF, while the jackpot game flag is set to ON.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes the display control process of the main display unit 37. By this display control process, the 7-segment display 372, 373 in the main display section 37, the symbol variation display is executed only during the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the symbol variation display is a symbol showing the lottery result. It will be displayed as a stop. Further, by the display control process, in the LED pair 371 in the main display portion 37, each LED lamp is blinked only during a predetermined normal symbol variation display time, and whether or not a normal symbol is won is turned on and off by a pair of LED lamps. Will be indicated by a lighting pattern that is a combination of In the case of a normal symbol winning, the electric accessory 315b attached to the second operating port 315 is opened for a predetermined time.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main processing has come (step S1308: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1301 and executes the processing of S1301 and subsequent steps described above. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main processing has not come (step S1308: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main processing comes, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing. During the remaining time, the steps S1308, S1309, and S1310 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the next main processing execution timing has come (step S1308: Yes).

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 updates the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value in the fluctuation type counter CS1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the MPU 41 updates the fluctuation type counter CS1 and then returns the process to step S1308.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
In step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the jackpot game. If the jackpot game is in progress (step S1401: Yes), the variable game control process is terminated and the jackpot game is not in progress. In the case (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. Whether or not to execute the jackpot game is set to ON when the jackpot gaming state is shifted to, for example, in the gaming state shift process in the main processing of FIG. 13, and is set to OFF when the jackpot gaming state is shifted to another gaming state. It is determined based on the jackpot game flag.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. If the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the symbol variation display is not in progress. (Step S1402: No), the process moves to step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed is set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 16 described later, and when the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the variation game control. The determination is made based on the variable display flag that is set to OFF in step S1405 of the process.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variable display, and when determining that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), moves the process to step S1404. If it is determined that the variation display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variation game control process is ended.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 to stop and display the symbol corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game ( In step S1404), the variable display flag is set to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
When the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 sets the number of reservations N stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA of the holding storage area 412b and the number-of-holds M stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAB. It is determined whether both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the number N of reservations and the number M of reservations are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the variation game control process. On the other hand, if either the number N of reservations or the number M of reservations is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes data setting processing for the data of the hit/miss information stored in the hold storage area 412b. When the process of step S1407 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1408. The details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variation start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to perform a variation display based on the hit/miss information stored in the execution area AE, and ends the variation game control process. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, an example of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
In step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number M of reservations corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and when the number M of reservations is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502. To do. On the other hand, when the number M of reservations is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reservations N stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA (step S1502), and changes from the first holding area REA1 to the execution area AE. The hit/miss information is moved (step S1503). Then, the MPU 41 shifts the hit/miss information of the second holding area REA2 to the fourth holding area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the hit/fail information of the second hold area REA2 is moved to the first hold area REA1, the hit/fail information of the third hold area REA3 is moved to the second hold area REA2, and the fourth hold area REA4 is moved. The hit/miss information is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the process of step S1504 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 shifts when the number M of reservations is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 shifts when either or both of the number M of reservations and the number N of reservations are not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. Yes (step S1406: No). Therefore, when the number M of reservations is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the number N of reservations is not 0, and thus executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

  Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number M of reservations stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the hit/miss information from the first holding area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the hit/miss information of the second holding area REB2 to the fourth holding area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the hit/fail information of the second hold area REB2 is moved to the first hold area REB1, the hit/fail information of the third hold area REB3 is moved to the second hold area REB2, and the fourth hold area REB4 is moved. The hit/miss information is moved to the third reservation area REB3. When the process of step S1507 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets, in the RAM 412, a shift command indicating that the hit/miss information of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 or the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 has been shifted. Then, the shift command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 13) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display portion 341 is changed. When the process of step S1508 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and moves the process to step S1408 of FIG.

[Variation start processing]
Here, an example of the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
In step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state is the high probability mode. Whether or not the high-probability mode is set is determined based on, for example, whether or not the high-probability mode flag that is set to ON in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 13 is set to ON. .. When the gaming state is the high-probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1602, and when the gaming state is not the high-probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, the gaming state is the low-probability mode. If there is, the process moves to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 counts the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hit/miss information stored in the execution area AE of the pending storage area 412b as numerical information, based on the high-probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 9B). It is determined whether or not the value is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. On the other hand, in step S1604, the MPU 41, on the basis of the low-probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 9(B)), hits random number counter C1 included in the hit/miss information stored in the execution area AE of the pending storage area 412b as numerical information It is determined whether or not the counter value of is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the fluctuation display time of the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation game to the fluctuation display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the hit determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal big hit, the MPU 41 determines a change pattern based on the change type counter CS1 and the normal big hit change table (see FIG. 9E). Identify. Further, when the result of the hit determination in step S1602 or S1603 is the probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 9F). .. Further, when the result of the hit determination in step S1602 or S1603 is wrong, the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the deviation fluctuation table (see FIG. 9G).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets, in the RAM 412, a variation pattern command including the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604. Thereby, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 13) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the variation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

  As described above, when the lottery result is “normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds “A” indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot to the variation patterns “01” to “03” to “A01” to “O”. Any one of "A03" is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “5R certainty variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 is one of “B01” to “B03” with “B” indicating that the variation patterns “01” to “03” are 5R certainty variation jackpots. This is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "C01" to "C03" with "C" indicating that the variation pattern "01" to "03" indicates a 16R probability variation jackpot. This is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 changes one of “D01” to “D08” with “D” indicating that it is out of change pattern “01” to “08”. It is set in the RAM 412 as a command. Further, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 causes the variation pattern command to include information indicating whether it is a front/rear outreach, a reach other than front/rear outreach, or a complete outreach.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 and ends the variation start process. When the MPU 41 starts the variable display of symbols on the main display unit 37, it sets the variable display flag to ON.

[Processing of voice lamp controller 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  It is also conceivable as another embodiment that a part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. Further, in the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the illumination portion 27, startup processing at startup of the audio lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at power failure, etc. Description of those processes will be omitted.

[Sub-timer interrupt process of voice lamp controller 5]
Here, FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes, for example, the sub-timer interrupt process as a regular process with a cycle of 1 msec.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the MPU 51 performs operation button operation detection processing (step S1701), operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1702), touch operation detection processing (step S1703), touch operation detection pattern in the sub-timer interrupt processing. The determination process (step S1704), the counter update process (step S1705), the command determination process (step S1706), the variable game effect process (step S1707), and the jackpot game effect process (step S1708) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection process]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process (step S1701) in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation button operation detection process, the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, so that the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence or absence will be determined.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 18, in step S1801, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second operation detection flag to the first operation detection flag. Further, in step S1802, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third operation detection flag to the second operation detection flag. After that, in step S1803, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third operation detection flag, and the operation button operation detection process ends.

  As described above, in the operation button operation detection process, the processes of steps S1801 to S1803 are executed, so that the operation states of the operation button 20 are the first operation detection flag to the third operation state of the latest three operations at 1 msec intervals. It is stored in the RAM 512 as an operation detection flag. Specifically, the latest operation state is stored as the third operation detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second operation detection flag, and the two previous operation states are stored as the first operation detection flag. ..

[Operation detection pattern determination processing]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process (step S1702) in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection pattern determination process, an operation pattern for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. Set the flag. The operation pattern flag includes first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 22A, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is continued. If only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has started. If only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has ended. Then, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 is not operated.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 19, in step S1901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, when the first operation detection flag is on (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1902, and when the first operation detection flag is off (step S1901: No), the processing is executed. The process moves to step S1905.

<Step S1902>
In step S1902, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1903, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1902: No), the processing is executed. The process moves to step S1908.

<Step S1903>
In step S1903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1904, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S1903: No), the processing is executed. The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1904>
In step S1904, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag to on, sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 can determine that the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing when the operation patterns of “on”, “on”, and “on” occur as the operation states of the operation button 20 for three times. , The first operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 22A). Then, the first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing.

<Step S1905>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S1901 that the first operation detection flag is off (step S1901: No), whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. Is determined (step S1905). Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S1905: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1906, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S1905: No), the processing is executed. The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1906>
In step S1906, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S1906: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1907, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S1906: No), the processing is executed. The process moves to step S1910.

<Step S1907>
In step S1907, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag to on, sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 changes the operation button 20 from the non-operation state to the operation state when the operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times (operation). The second operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 22A). Then, the second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S1908>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S1902 that the second operation detection flag is off (step S1902: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. Yes (step S1908). Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S1908: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1910, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S1908: No), the processing is performed. The process moves to step S1909.

<Step S1909>
In step S1909, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag to on, sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 changes the operation button 20 from the operation state to the non-operation state when an operation pattern of “on”, “off”, and “off” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times (operation). Since it can be determined that the third operation pattern flag is turned on, the third operation pattern flag is set to on, and the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 22A). Then, the third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state using the third operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected, so that the radio wave Alternatively, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity, and to prevent the operation display of the operation end of the operation button 20 at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S1910>
In step S1910, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “off”, “off”, or “off”, occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times. (See FIG. 22A). The MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operation state when all the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Touch operation detection process]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation detection process (step S1703) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the touch operation detection process, the touch operation state for a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display section 341 is detected based on the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, and the symbol display section 341 is detected. A process for sequentially updating the past three touch operation histories for a predetermined area on the front side (specific area of the panel 25) (for example, the cross-hatched portion in FIG. 6C) is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the touch operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, so that the front of the symbol display unit 341 is set at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. The presence/absence of a touch operation by the player on a predetermined area on the side (a specific area on the panel 25) is determined.

<Steps S2001 to S2003>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S2001, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second touch operation detection flag to the first touch operation detection flag. Further, in step S2002, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third touch operation detection flag to the second touch operation detection flag. After that, in step S2003, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the detection result of the presence of the object detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d in the third touch operation detection flag, and the touch operation detection process ends. For example, in the MPU 51, when the presence of an object is detected by all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the object is present in a specific area (a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) on the panel 25 ( It has been touched by the player). On the contrary, when the presence of the object is not detected by one or more of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the MPU 51 places the object in a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Is not present (touch operation is not performed by the player).

  In this way, in the touch operation detection processing, the processing of steps S2001 to S2003 is executed, and thus the touch operation history for the predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is updated at the nearest interval of 1 msec. The touch operation states for three times are stored in the RAM 512 as the first touch operation detection flag to the third touch operation detection flag. Specifically, the latest touch operation state is stored as the third touch operation detection flag, the previous touch operation state is stored as the second touch operation detection flag, and the second previous touch is stored as the first touch operation detection flag. The operation state is stored.

[Touch operation detection pattern determination process]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation detection pattern determination process (step S1704) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the touch operation detection pattern determination process, from the touch operation history determined based on the first touch operation detection flag, the second touch operation detection flag, and the third touch operation detection flag, a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (panel The touch operation pattern flag for determining the touch operation state for the specific area 25) is set. The touch operation pattern flag includes first to third touch operation pattern flags, and a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (a specific area on the panel 25) depending on a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third touch operation pattern flags. The touch operation state for can be determined. For example, as shown in FIG. 22B, when only the first touch operation pattern flag is set to ON, a touch operation on a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Can be determined to continue. When only the second touch operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the touch operation on the predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 has started. When only the third touch operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the touch operation on a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is completed. Then, when all of the first to third touch operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it is determined that the touch operation is not performed on the predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. it can.

<Steps S2101 to S2105>
As shown in FIG. 21, in steps S2101 to S2105, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first touch operation detection flag for the touch operation detection processing two previous steps is set to ON, and the touch operation detection processing one step before. It is determined whether or not the second touch operation detection flag for is set to ON, and whether the third touch operation detection flag for the most recent touch operation detection process is set to ON.

<Steps S2107 to S2110>
In steps S2107 to S2110, the MPU 51 sets the first to third touch operation pattern flags on the basis of the determination result of whether the first to third touch operation detection flags in steps S2101 to S2105 are ON. Set to on or off.

  Specifically, in step S2107, the MPU 51 sets the second touch operation pattern flag to on, sets the first touch operation pattern flag and the third touch operation pattern flag to off, and ends the touch operation detection pattern determination process. . That is, when the MPU 51 generates touch operation patterns of “off”, “on”, and “on” as touch operation states for three times with respect to a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, Since it can be determined that the non-touch operation state has changed to the touch operation state (the touch operation has started) with respect to the predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display portion 341, the second touch operation pattern flag is set. It is set to ON, and the first touch operation pattern flag and the third touch operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 22B).

  In addition, in step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the first touch operation pattern flag to on, sets the second touch operation pattern flag and the third touch operation pattern flag to off, and ends the touch operation detection pattern determination processing. That is, the MPU 51, when a touch operation pattern of "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs as the operation state for three times with respect to a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, Since it can be determined that the touch operation state on the predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 is continuing, the first touch operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second touch operation pattern flag and The third touch operation pattern flag is set to off (see FIG. 22(B)).

  Further, in step S2109, the MPU 51 sets the third touch operation pattern flag to ON and the first touch operation pattern flag and the second touch operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the touch operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the MPU 51 generates touch operation patterns of “on”, “off”, and “off” as touch operation states for three times with respect to a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display portion 341, The third touch operation pattern flag is turned on because it can be determined that the touch operation state has changed from the touch operation state to the predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (the touch operation has ended). Then, the first touch operation pattern flag and the second touch operation pattern flag are turned off (see FIG. 22B).

  Further, in step S2110, the MPU 51 sets the first touch operation pattern flag, the second touch operation pattern flag, and the third touch operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the touch operation detection pattern determination processing. That is, the MPU 51 generates a touch operation pattern other than the above such as “OFF”, “OFF”, and “OFF” as the touch operation state for three times with respect to the predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. In this case, all the first to third touch operation pattern flags are set to OFF (see FIG. 22B). When all of the first to third touch operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is in a non-touch state.

[Counter update process]
Here, returning to the description of FIG. 17, in the counter update processing (step S1705), the MPU 51 updates the effect pattern type counter, the variable display counter, the first to fourth touch operation effect type counters, the specific effect type counter, and the like. Run. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the effect pattern type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The effect type counter updated here is used to determine the change type and the effect type based on the change pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. On the other hand, the MPU 51 decrements the variable display counter by 1. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the symbol display portion 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining fluctuation display time, that the fluctuation is in progress, that the fluctuation display of the symbol display unit 341 has ended, and the like. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the first to fourth touch operation effect type counters, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The first to fourth touch operation effect type counters updated here touch the predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. It is used to determine the touch operation effect type executed by the operation. For example, the first touch operation effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 39, the second touch operation effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 59, and the third touch operation effect type The counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 79, and the fourth touch operation effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the specific effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The specific effect type counter updated here is the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 during the second to fourth touch operation reception periods R2 to R4 during execution of the super reach effect or the special reach effect. It is used to determine a specific effect type to be executed instead of the touch operation effect when is detected. For example, the specific effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S1706), in the command determination process, the command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination processing executed in step S1706 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (step S2201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2202. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S2201: No), the command determination process ends. The command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 refers to the unprocessed command storage area to determine whether or not the command is received. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is erased from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S2201 and becomes the processing target, and is stored in, for example, the processing work storage area. Remembered.

<Step S2202>
In step S2202, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. Here, if the MPU 51 is a fluctuation pattern command (step S2202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2203, and if the received command is not a fluctuation pattern command (step S2202: No), the process proceeds to step S2206.

<Step S2203>
In step S2203, the MPU 51 determines the stop symbol combination of the main symbols and the variation type (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 stores the variation pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 24A) and the variation type table (see FIG. 24B) stored in the ROM 511 in advance, and the RAM 512. Based on the counter value of the effect pattern type counter being performed, the stop symbol combination of the main symbol and the variation type (effect pattern) are determined. Further, when the variation pattern command includes the information about the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag according to the jackpot type to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R regular jackpot, and sets the 5R sure variation jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R probability variation jackpot, and the jackpot type. Is a 16R certainty variation jackpot, the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag is set to ON.

  The stop symbol combination of the main symbols consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the main symbol that is first stopped and displayed in the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is the main symbol that is secondly stopped and displayed, and the final stop symbol is finally and stop displayed. It is a design. In the production pattern type table, the normal reach production pattern type table (see FIG. 25A) in which the final individual production type in the variable game production is the normal reach production (see FIG. 27), and the final individual production type in the variable game production is Super reach production pattern type table (see FIG. 25(B)) that is super reach production (see FIG. 27), special reach production pattern type in which the final individual production type in the variable game production is special reach production (see FIG. 27) A table (see FIG. 25(C)) is included.

  Here, FIG. 24A is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 24(A), in the first stop symbol selection table, the main symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display portion 341 is determined. In addition, in FIG. 24(A), the main symbols are "1" to "9", and "333" is a probability variation jackpot (either a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot), which is a symbol combination, "777". "Is a symbol combination that indicates that it is a 16R certainty variation jackpot, and the other than "333" and "777" is a 5R regular jackpot, 5R certainty variation jackpot and 16R certainty variation jackpot. It is assumed.

  The lottery result of the jackpot lottery by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and from the main symbols other than "3" and "7" The first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is "5R regular big hit", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating that it is the 5R certainty big jackpot or the 16R certainty big jackpot (the certainty big jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

  Further, the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", there is no distribution of "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than "7". That is, when the lottery result is "5R certainty variation jackpot", the symbol combination of "777" indicating the 16R certainty variation jackpot is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is “5R probability variable jackpot”, the symbol combinations of the doublet other than the symbol combination “333” indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "5R probability variation big hit", the symbol combination other than the symbol combination "333", which is the main symbol stop display result suggesting the 5R normal big hit, can be stopped and displayed. And, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", if the main symbols other than "3" except "7" are determined as the first stop symbol, in the jackpot game to be transferred after the end of the variation game, The promotion effect that clearly shows that the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot” is executed.

  Furthermore, in the lottery result "16R probability variation jackpot", there is a distribution for all the main symbols of "1" to "9", and the first stop with a predetermined probability from the main symbols of "1" to "9". The design is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combinations other than the symbol combination "777" indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the stop display of the main symbol suggests a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot. Can be done. Then, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", if the main symbol other than "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, in the jackpot game to be transferred after the end of the variation game, the lottery result is "16R A promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a "probably strange jackpot" is executed.

  Then, the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a big hit, and determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol determined earlier. As a result, the stop symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the symbol display portion 341 in the variable game is determined.

  On the other hand, the lottery result is "out", there is a distribution for all the main symbols of "1" to "9", the first stop symbol determination with a predetermined probability from the main symbols of "1" to "9" To be done. Then, the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the result of the lottery is “out”, and the information regarding the out type selected based on the out type table (see FIG. 9D), and previously determined. The second stop symbol is determined based on the first stop symbol. For example, if the disengagement type is front-rear reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. Further, if the disconnection type is a reach other than the front/rear disconnection, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. It is decided by the design. Further, when the disengagement type is completely disengaged, the second stop symbol is determined as a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined irrespective of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The stop symbol combination of the main symbols may be determined in the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined in the voice lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol in the display control device 6. You may decide.

  Further, FIG. 24B is a diagram showing an example of the fluctuation type table. As shown in FIG. 24B, in the fluctuation type table, the contents of the fluctuation display time and the fluctuation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command are defined. For example, the variation display time “30 s” and the variation type “normal reach effect pattern” are associated with the variation pattern command “A01” whose lottery result is “normal jackpot” and the variation pattern is “01”. In addition, the variation display time “60 s” and the variation type “super reach production pattern” are associated with the variation pattern command “B02” in which the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot” and the variation pattern is “02”. The variation display time “90 s” and the variation type “special reach effect pattern” are associated with the variation pattern command “C03” in which the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot” and the variation pattern is “03”. Furthermore, the variation pattern command “D04” whose lottery result is “out” and the variation pattern is “04” is associated with the variation display time “7s” and the variation type “non-reach effect pattern”. A fluctuation display time “10 s” and a fluctuation type “non-reach effect pattern” are associated with the fluctuation pattern command “D05” whose result is “out” and the fluctuation pattern is “05”.

  Further, FIG. 25(A) to FIG. 25(C) are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type table. The effect pattern type table is set for each variation type (effect pattern). Specifically, FIG. 25(A) is a normal reach effect pattern type table that is referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect (see FIG. 27), and FIG. 25(B) is the variable game. FIG. 25C is a super-reach effect pattern table that is referenced when the final individual effect type in the effect is the super-reach effect (see FIG. 27). It is a special reach effect pattern table referred to in the case of (see FIG. 27).

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described as an example in which there are five types of effect corresponding to each variation type, but the number of effect types may be six or more. Further, in FIG. 25, the effect type table when the change type is no reach is omitted.

  In the normal reach effect pattern type table shown in FIG. 25(A), as the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter, in accordance with the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and deviation). "Production pattern X1" to "production pattern X5" are defined. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the normal reach effect pattern, it selects the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter from the normal reach effect pattern type table according to the lottery result. To do. Here, the effect pattern X1 to effect pattern X3 included in the normal reach effect pattern type table is an effect in which the normal reach effect in which the main symbol is in the reach state is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect in which the main symbol changes at high speed, This is an effect in which the final individual effect type is the normal reach effect (see FIG. 27).

  In the super reach effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25(B), "effect pattern Y1" to "effect pattern Y5" are defined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. There is. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the super reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the super reach effect pattern table according to the lottery result. select. Here, for the effect patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super reach effect pattern table, for example, the normal reach effect is executed after the high speed variable effect is finished, and the final individual effect type has a higher jackpot expectation degree than the normal reach effect. This is an effect that develops into a super reach effect having a longer effect execution time than the normal reach effect (see FIG. 27). The super-reach effect pattern table may include a super-reach effect pattern effect that develops into a super-reach effect after the high-speed variable effect ends without passing through the normal reach effect.

  Further, in the special reach effect pattern table shown in FIG. 25C, "effect pattern Z1" to "effect pattern Z5" are defined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. There is. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the special reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 determines the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter from the special reach effect pattern table according to the lottery result. select. Here, for the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach effect pattern table, for example, the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are executed after the high-speed variable effect is finished, and further, the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are the final individual effect types. This is a production that has a higher jackpot expectation and develops into a special reach production having a longer production execution time than the normal reach production (see FIG. 27). In addition, the special reach production pattern table may include a special reach production pattern that develops into a special reach production after completion of high speed fluctuation production or normal reach production without passing through at least one of normal reach production and super reach production. Good.

  Then, the MPU 51 sends to the RAM 512 the display pattern pattern command indicating the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the stop symbol combination of the main symbols determined based on the production type table and the production type counter, and the variation type (production pattern type). Set.

<Step S2204>
Returning to the description of FIG. 23, in step S2204, the MPU 51 executes the movable accessory member operation timing determination processing for determining the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 (the execution period of the movable accessory member operation effect). In the movable accessory member operation timing determination process, the movable accessory member 39 at each of the plurality of operation timings is based on the movable accessory member operation timing selection table selected according to the effect pattern type determined in step S2203. Whether or not (the presence or absence of execution of the movable accessory member operation effect) is determined.

  Here, FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of the movable accessory member operation effect. The movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a chance up effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a big hit, or as a confirmed effect (one notification effect) that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a jackpot. It This movable accessory member operation effect is displayed from the standby position where the movable accessory member 39 does not obstruct the visual effect of the image effect executed by the symbol display portion 341 shown in FIG. 26(A), from the symbol display shown in FIG. 26(B). The effect is to move to the operating position, which is the front of the center of the portion 341, and then return to the standby position shown in FIG.

  In the movable accessory member operation effect, the movable accessory member 39 is stopped for a certain period at the operation position shown in FIG. At this time, in the movable accessory member 39, a plurality of lamps 391 provided in an annular shape on the peripheral portion suggest the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, or that the lottery result is a jackpot. Explicitly. For example, the lighting color of the plurality of lamps 391 indicates the jackpot expectation degree for the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Specifically, the lighting colors of the plurality of lamps 391 are set so that the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of white, yellow, green, and red, and the movable accessory member 39 is displayed in the movable accessory member operation effect. While stopped at the standby position shown in FIG. 26(B), the plurality of lamps 391 are turned on in the lighting color of the jackpot expectation degree determined according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. The lighting color of the plurality of lamps 391 may be a lighting mode that includes all of white, yellow, green, and red to clearly indicate that the lottery result is a big hit, and the lighting pattern and lighting. By appropriately setting the color, it is possible to clearly indicate that the lottery result is a big hit by executing the rainbow lamp effect.

  Of course, regardless of the lighting color of the plurality of lamps 391, a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the plurality of lamps 391 may be used to indicate the jackpot expectation degree or to clearly indicate that the jackpot is a jackpot. Further, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position shown in FIG. 26(B), an effect effect of generating an effect in the vicinity of the movable accessory member 39 in the symbol display portion 341 may be executed. In the effect presentation in this case, the jackpot expectation degree can be shown or the jackpot can be clearly indicated by the color and size of the effect.

  Further, when executing the movable accessory member operation effect, it is also possible to use the symbol display portion 341 to execute the chance effect that suggests the jackpot expectation. For example, as shown in FIG. 26(C), before moving the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position, the four lamps 391 arranged in the portion exposed from the opening 31A of the movable accessory member 39 are provided. Correspondingly, it is conceivable that the effect in which the image indicating the jackpot expectation degree and future effect development is displayed in the symbol display unit 341 is displayed in the symbol display unit 341 is executed. In FIG. 26(C), in order from the left side of the symbol display portion 341, “?”, “chance” (implying big hit expectation), “reach” (implying production development) and “super heat” (implying big hit expectation). The character image of is displayed. Then, in the movable accessory part 39, a roulette effect in which one lamp 391 is turned on after the four lamps 391 are blinked is executed. Note that FIG. 26C shows a state in which the lamp 391 corresponding to the “chance” is turned on.

  In addition, when the roulette effect shown in FIG. 26C is executed, the movable accessory member 39 is moved to the operating position, and thus the plurality of lamps 391 of the movable accessory member 39 are used to expect a jackpot. It is also conceivable to execute an effect that suggests or a confirmed effect that clearly indicates that it is a big hit. For example, as shown in FIG. 26D, the jackpot expectation is suggested according to the number of the plurality of lamps 391 turned on (the larger the number of turned-on lamps, the higher the jackpot expectation is), and all the lamps 391 are turned on. In the case of doing, it is possible to make a big hit finalized production. Hereinafter, the effect that clearly shows that the lottery result is a big hit by the movable accessory effect may be referred to as “one-shot notification effect”.

  In addition, when the effect that suggests the jackpot expectation degree is executed by the number of the lit lamps 391 when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position (excluding the one-shot notification effect), the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position. When returning, development effects such as super reach effects and special reach effects may be executed. In this case, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position, the number of lamps 391 to be lit and the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the development effect (for example, the jackpot expectation degree of the development effect displayed at the start of execution of the development effect are The number of stars shown, etc.) may be linked. That is, it may be possible to suggest the jackpot expectation degree of the development effect to be executed later, depending on the number of the lit lamps 391 when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position. For example, when the expected jackpot of the development effect is suggested by the number of stars (for example, the number of stars is 1 to 5), when the development effect of three stars is executed as the development effect, the movable accessory member 39 operates. It is conceivable to set the number of lamps 391 to be turned on to three when they are in the position.

  In addition, when the one-shot notification effect is executed, the central part of the movable accessory member 39 may be turned on to emphasize that the effect is the finalized effect. Then, when the one-shot notification effect is executed, when the movable accessory member 39 returns to the standby position, the fluctuation of the main symbol may be stopped by a doublet, or the fluctuation of the main symbol is continued. After that, the main symbol may be stopped by double stitches. In addition, whether the variation of the main symbol is stopped when the movable accessory member 39 returns after the execution of the one-shot notification effect is determined by the relationship between the determined effect pattern and the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39. To be done.

  Further, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position, it is also possible to execute an effect of displaying an image for generating an effect around the movable accessory member 39 on the symbol display unit 341. In this case, it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation degree or to clearly indicate that it is a jackpot depending on the color and size of the effect. For example, by generating an iridescent effect around the movable accessory member 39, it is possible to clearly indicate that the jackpot is a big hit. The "one-shot notification effect" also includes an effect that clearly indicates that the jackpot is hit by generating an iridescent effect around the movable accessory member 39. That is, the "one-shot notification effect" is an effect that clearly shows that the lottery result is a big hit as the movable accessory member 39 is activated. It also includes the case where the jackpot confirmation effect is executed by the effect executed on the symbol display unit 341 in conjunction with the operation.

  Here, FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 and the touch operation reception period for the touch operation effect together with the effect pattern. First, the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 will be described with reference to FIG. The touch operation acceptance period for the touch operation effect will be referred to when the touch operation effect determination process of step S2205 described later is described. Further, in FIG. 27, it means that the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 defined after the end of the final individual effect in each effect pattern is not set in the effect pattern. For example, in FIG. 27, the operation timing G2 means that it is not set in the non-reach effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in this embodiment, six operation timings G1 to G6 are fixedly defined as the timings at which the movable accessory member 39 can operate. The operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 does not have to be fixedly defined for all the effect patterns, and for example, the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 may be specified individually for each effect pattern type.

  The operation timing G1 is started immediately after the start of the high speed fluctuation effect (immediately after the start of the fluctuation of the main symbol), and ends at the beginning of the high speed fluctuation effect. That is, the operation timing G1 can be set for the non-reach effect pattern, the normal reach effect pattern, the super reach effect pattern, and the special reach effect pattern.

  The operation timing G2 starts immediately after the start of the normal reach effect and ends at the beginning of the normal reach effect. That is, the operation timing G2 can be set for the normal reach effect pattern, the super reach effect pattern, and the special reach effect pattern.

  The operation timing G3 starts immediately after the start of the super reach effect and ends at the beginning of the super reach effect. The operation timing G4 is set in the middle stage of the super reach production. That is, the operation timings G3 and G4 can be set for the super reach effect pattern and the special reach effect pattern.

  The operation timing G5 starts immediately after the start of the special reach effect and ends at the beginning of the special reach effect. The operation timing G6 is set at the end of the special reach effect. That is, the operation timings G5 and G6 can be set for the special reach effect pattern.

  In other words, the number of operation timings set for each effect pattern type differs depending on the effect pattern type. Specifically, when the effect pattern is the non-reach effect pattern, the operation timing G1 is set in the early stage immediately after the start of the high speed fluctuation effect. The non-reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which only the high-speed fluctuation effect in which the main symbol changes at high speed immediately after the start of fluctuation is executed.

  When the effect pattern is the normal reach effect pattern, in addition to the operation timing G1, the operation timing G2 is set in the early stage immediately after the start of the normal reach effect. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the normal reach effect that does not develop into the super reach effect or the special reach effect is executed as the final individual effect after the high speed variable effect is finished.

  When the effect pattern is the super reach effect pattern, in addition to the operation timings G1 and G2, the operation timing G3 in the opening stage immediately after the start of the super reach effect and the operation timing G4 in the middle stage of the super reach effect are set. ing. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the super reach effect is executed as the final individual effect after the high speed variable effect and the normal reach effect are finished.

  When the production pattern is the special reach production pattern, in addition to the operation timings G1 to G4, the opening operation timing G5 immediately after the start of the special reach production and the operation timing G6 of the final stage of the super reach production are set. ing. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the special reach effect is executed as the final individual effect after the high speed variation effect, the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are finished.

  Here, FIGS. 28 to 30 are views showing examples of the movable accessory member operation timing selection tables A to C. In the movable accessory member operation timing selection table A shown in FIG. 28, the effect pattern type is the normal reach effect. In some cases, the movable accessory member member 39 is referred to when determining the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39, and the movable accessory member operation timing selection table B shown in FIG. It is referred to when determining the operation timing, and the movable accessory member operation timing selection table C shown in FIG. 30 is referred to when the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 is determined when the effect pattern type is the special reach effect. It

  28 to 30, "◎" indicates that the movable accessory member 39 is activated as a big hit confirmation effect (one-shot notification effect), and "○" indicates a chance-up effect (big hit expectation suggesting effect). The accessory member 39 is operated, "x" means that the movable accessory member 39 is not operated, and "-" means that the corresponding operation timing does not exist. 28 to 30, the case where the effect pattern is the non-reach effect pattern is omitted, but whether to execute the movable accessory member operation effect may be appropriately set.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the movable auditor member member operation timing selection table A referred to when the effect pattern type is the normal reach effect, the effect pattern types (effect patterns X1 to X5) of the normal reach effect patterns, Whether to operate the movable accessory member 39 at each of the operation timings G1 and G2 of the movable accessory member 39 (whether to execute the movable accessory member operation effect) according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. It is prescribed.

  For example, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern X1 and the lottery result is the 5R probability variation big hit, the movable accessory member 39 is activated at the operation timing G1, and the movable accessory member 39 is not activated at the operation timing G2. That is, when the effect pattern X1 is selected when the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect only immediately after the start of the high-speed variation effect in the normal reach effect pattern.

  When the effect pattern type is the effect pattern X3 and the lottery result is off, the movable accessory member 39 is not operated at both the operation timing G1 and the operation timing G2. In other words, if the effect pattern X3 is selected when the result of the lottery is out, the movable accessory member operation effect is not executed at all in the normal reach effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the movable accessory member operation timing selection table B referred to when the effect pattern type is the super reach effect is for each effect pattern type (effect patterns Y1 to Y5) of the super reach effect patterns. Whether or not to operate the movable accessory member 39 at each of the operation timings G1 to G4 of the movable accessory member 39 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery (whether or not to execute the movable accessory member operation effect). ) Is specified.

  For example, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Y1 and the lottery result is the 5R normal big hit, the movable accessory member 39 is operated only at the operation timing G3 among the operation timings G1 to G4, and the remaining operation timings. The movable accessory member 39 is not activated in G1, G2, and G4. That is, when the effect pattern Y1 is selected when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect only immediately after the start of the super reach effect in the super reach effect pattern.

  When the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Y3 and the lottery result is the 16R probability variation big hit, the movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timings G2 and G3 among the operation timings G1 to G4, and the remaining operations are performed. The movable accessory member 39 is not activated at the timings G1 and G4. That is, when the effect pattern Y3 is selected when the lottery result is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the movable accessory member operation effect is provided as a chance up effect immediately after the start of the normal reach effect in the normal reach effect pattern and immediately after the start of the super reach effect. To be executed.

  When the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Y5 and the lottery result is out of alignment, the movable accessory member 39 is operated only at the operation timing G1 of the operation timings G1 to G4, and the remaining operation timings G2 to G2. In G4, the movable accessory member 39 is not activated. That is, when the effect pattern Y5 is selected when the lottery result is out of order, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect only immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation effect in the special reach effect pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the movable accessory member operation timing selection table C referred to when the effect pattern type is the special reach effect pattern, the effect pattern types (effect patterns Z1 to Z5) of the special reach effect patterns. Whether or not to operate the movable accessory member 39 at each of the operation timings G1 to G6 of the movable accessory member 39 according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery (whether or not to execute the movable accessory member operation effect). Is specified.

  For example, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Z1 and the lottery result is the 5R normal big hit, the movable accessory member 39 is operated only at the operation timing G3 among the operation timings G1 to G6, and the remaining operation timings. The movable accessory member 39 is not activated in G1, G2, G4 to G6. That is, when the effect pattern Z1 is selected when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect only immediately after the start of the super reach effect in the special reach effect pattern.

  Further, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Z3 and the lottery result is the 16R probability variable big hit, the movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timings G5 and G6 among the operation timings G1 to G6, and the remaining operations are performed. The movable accessory member 39 is not activated at timings G1 to G4. That is, when the effect pattern Z3 is selected when the lottery result is the 16R probability variable jackpot, the movable accessory member is used as a jackpot finalized effect (one notification effect) immediately after the start of the special reach effect in the special reach effect pattern and at the end. The operation effect is executed.

  When the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Z4 and the lottery result is the 5R normal big hit, the movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timings G2, G3, and G6 among the operation timings G1 to G6, and the rest. The movable accessory member 39 is not operated at the operation timings G1, G4, and G5. That is, when the effect pattern Z4 is selected when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a chance up effect immediately after the start of the normal reach effect in the special reach effect pattern and immediately after the start of the supermarket. Then, in the final stage of the special reach effect, the movable accessory member actuation effect is executed as a jackpot confirmation effect (one-shot notification effect).

  Then, the MPU 51, based on the effect pattern determined in step S2203 and the movable accessory member operation timing selection tables A to C selected according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, the movable prize at each operation timing. Whether or not the object member 39 is operated (whether or not the movable accessory member operation effect is executed) is determined. The operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 thus determined is stored in the RAM 512, and the movable accessory member operation effect is executed during the execution of the variable game effect based on the operation timing stored in the RAM 512.

<Step S2205>
Returning to the description of FIG. 23, in step S2205, the MPU 51 executes touch operation effect determination processing. In the touch operation effect determination process, the acceptance period and the content of the touch operation effect are determined. The details of the touch operation effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, the touch operation effect may be determined at a stage when it is determined that the touch operation effect is executed by performing the touch operation within the touch operation acceptance period. In this case, the touch operation effect determination process in the command determination process is omitted, and instead of determining the touch operation effect in step S2205, the touch operation acceptance period may be determined.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The fluctuation display time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern command. Then, the variable display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter updating process of step S1705 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 17, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol variable display is being performed based on the variable display counter. It is possible to judge the remaining time and the like. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variable display ends when the counter value of the variable display counter becomes 0.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 51 displays the display variation pattern command for identifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbols in the symbol display unit 341, the variation type (effect pattern), and the content of the variable game effect including the touch operation effect. 6, and terminates the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbols determined in step S2203 and the content of the variation game effect. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image of the main symbol corresponding to each display variation pattern command, an effect image, and the like. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and the effect display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the main symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type and the variation game effect, The movable accessory member operation effect, the voice output effect, and the lamp effect are executed with respect to other effect means such as the movable accessory member 39.

  Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variable display of a plurality of main symbols (three in the present embodiment) until the preset variable display time elapses. Then, the fluctuations of the plurality of main symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed. Then, when all the main symbols are stopped and the result of the big hit lottery is displayed, the symbol fluctuation display of the next variable game or the process corresponding to the big hit game is executed. Here, during the variable display of the main symbol, the game effect specified by the display variation pattern command is executed.

<Step S2208>
In step S2208, the MPU 51 executes a process based on another command received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination process.

[Touch operation effect determination process]
Here, FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect determination processing executed in step S2205 in the command determination processing of FIG. In the touch operation effect determination process, a plurality of touch operations are performed based on the effect pattern determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and the value of the touch operation effect type lottery counter. A touch operation effect when a touch operation is performed during the touch operation reception period is determined for each reception timing.

  By the way, in the gaming machine 10 in which the movable accessory member operation effect and the touch operation effect are executed, the movable accessory member 39 operates within the touch operation acceptance period, and thus it is erroneous that the touch operation is performed by the player. May be detected. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (step S2202 of FIG. 23: Yes), the touch operation is performed after the operation timing determination process of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2204 of FIG. 23). The effect determination process is executed (step S2205 in FIG. 23). Therefore, in order to avoid erroneous detection due to the operation of the movable accessory member 39, the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 determined in step S2202 of FIG. It is also possible to decide. However, determining the touch operation acceptance period while avoiding the previously determined actuation timing of the movable accessory member 39 complicates the control process and restricts the touch operation acceptance period (touch operation effect execution period). Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is determined without considering the previously determined operation timing of the movable accessory member 39.

  Here, FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of the touch operation effect. Specifically, FIG. 32A is a diagram showing an example of the touch operation effect A in which the touch operation acceptance effect that clearly indicates that the touch operation acceptance period is in progress is not executed, and FIG. It is a figure showing an example of touch operation production B by which operation acceptance production is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 32(A) (FIG. 32(A1) to FIG. 32(A3)), the touch operation effect A in which the touch operation reception effect is not executed is a so-called back button effect, and is internally touched by the gaming machine 10. When a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 during the operation acceptance period, for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 for a certain period of time. is there. The touch operation effect A may be an effect that suggests or clearly indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, or may be an effect in which a predetermined image is displayed regardless of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Further, the touch operation effect A may be repeatedly executed when there are a plurality of touch operations during the touch operation reception period, or may be executed only for the first touch operation and for the second time. It may not be executed by the subsequent touch operation.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32(B1), in the touch operation effect B, the touch operation acceptance effect that clearly indicates that the touch operation acceptance period is in progress is executed. In the present embodiment, as the touch operation reception effect, a touch operation reception image (characters “touch the screen”) that clearly indicates that it is the touch operation reception period is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. In the touch operation effect B, when a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 while the touch operation reception image is displayed (touch operation reception period). For example, it is an effect in which a predetermined image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 for a certain period. The touch operation effect B may be an effect that suggests or clearly indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, or may be an effect in which a predetermined image is displayed regardless of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. It is preferable that it is an effect that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the lottery. Further, the touch operation effect B may be repeatedly executed when a plurality of touch operations are performed during the touch operation reception period, or may be executed only for the first touch operation and for the second time. Although it may not be executed by the subsequent touch operation, it is preferably executed only for the first touch operation.

  When the touch operation effect A or the touch operation effect B is executed as an effect that suggests or clearly indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery (an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation degree), for example, a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (panel 25 The expectation level is suggested by the type of image displayed when a touch operation is performed on a specific area), and it is clearly indicated that the jackpot is a big hit. The touch operation effect may be executed as a voice output effect by the speaker 26 or a lamp effect by the illumination unit 27, and a touch operation is performed by combining two or more of the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, and the illumination unit 27. You may execute the effect. Also, when the touch operation effect is executed in the voice output effect by the speaker 26 or the lamp effect by the illumination portion 27, these effects may be executed as an effect suggesting the jackpot expectation.

  Here, FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 and the touch operation reception period as described above together with the effect pattern, and the touch operation reception period will be described with reference to FIG. 27. . As shown in FIG. 27, in the present embodiment, the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 are fixedly defined. Note that the touch operation acceptance period does not have to be fixedly defined for all the effect patterns, and for example, the touch operation acceptance period may be specified individually for each effect pattern type.

  Further, in FIG. 27, in the effect pattern in which the final individual effect ends in the middle of the first touch operation acceptance period R1 or the second touch operation acceptance period R2, the first touch operation acceptance period R1 or the second touch operation acceptance period R2. Means that is not set. For example, in the non-reach effect pattern of FIG. 27, it is described that the high-speed variation effect which is the final individual effect ends in the middle of the first touch operation acceptance period R1, and the first touch operation acceptance period R1. It means that it is not set. Similarly, in the normal reach effect pattern of FIG. 27, the normal reach effect, which is the final individual effect, is described as ending in the middle of the second touch operation acceptance period R2, and the second touch operation acceptance period R2 is set. Means not been done. Of course, in FIG. 27, it means that the touch operation acceptance period defined after the end of the final individual effect in each effect pattern is not set in the effect pattern.

  The first touch operation acceptance period R1 and the second touch operation acceptance period R2 are periods in which a touch operation for the touch operation effect A (see 32(A)) is accepted, and from the third and fourth touch operation acceptance periods R3, R4. Is set to be relatively long and relatively long. The first touch operation acceptance period R1 is a period that continues from immediately after the start of the high-speed fluctuation effect to the middle stage of the normal reach effect. The first touch operation acceptance period R1 is set for the normal reach effect patterns (X1 to X3), the super reach effect patterns (Y1 to Y3), and the special reach effect patterns (Z1 to Z3). Further, the operation timings G1 and G2 of the movable accessory member 39 are set in the first touch operation reception period R1. On the other hand, the second touch operation reception period R2 is a period that continues from the first touch operation reception period R1 and continues from the middle stage of the normal reach production to the beginning of the super reach production. The second touch operation acceptance period R2 is set for the super reach effect patterns (Y1 to Y3) and the special reach effect patterns (Z1 to Z3). The operation timing G3 of the movable accessory member 39 is set in the second touch operation reception period R2. The second touch operation acceptance period R2 does not have to be continuous with the first touch operation acceptance period R1 and may be separated from the first touch operation acceptance period R1.

  The third touch operation reception period R3 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4 are periods in which a touch operation for the touch operation effect B (see 32(B)) is received. The third touch operation acceptance period R3 is set in the middle stage of the super reach production, and is set for the super reach production pattern (Y1 to Y3) and the special reach production pattern (Z1 to Z3). The third touch operation reception period R3 partially overlaps with the operation timing G4 of the movable accessory member 39. Specifically, the third touch operation reception period R3 starts at the operation timing G4 and ends after a fixed time after the end of the operation timing G4. On the other hand, the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 is set immediately after the start of the special reach effect, and is set for the special reach effect pattern (Z1 to Z3). The fourth touch operation reception period R4 overlaps a part of the operation timing G5 of the movable accessory member 39. Specifically, the fourth touch operation reception period R4 starts at the same time as the operation timing G5 and ends midway of the operation timing G5.

  Here, FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 are diagrams showing an example of the touch operation effect selection table. The touch operation effect selection table is for selecting a touch operation effect to be executed when a touch operation is performed during the touch operation acceptance period, and is referred to in the touch operation effect determination process of FIG. 31. 33 and 34, the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (the jackpot expectation degree) is also shown for the touch operation effect.

  FIG. 33A shows a touch operation executed when the touch operation is performed in the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect A (see FIG. 32A). It is a diagram showing an example of a touch operation effect selection table A1 for determining an effect. In the touch operation effect selection table A, in accordance with the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and deviation), the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is “touch”. "Operation effect A1-1" to "touch operation effect A1-4" and "no touch operation effect" are set.

  The "touch operation effect A1-1" has a jackpot expectation of "very low", the "touch operation effect A1-2" has a jackpot expectation of "low", and the "touch operation effect A1-3" has a jackpot expectation. The degree is “medium”, and the “touch operation effect A1-4” has a jackpot expectation degree of “high”. In "no touch operation effect", the touch operation effect is not executed even if the touch operation is performed in the first touch operation acceptance period R1. When the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation effect in the first touch operation acceptance period R1 needs to be determined, the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is determined by the lottery result. Select according to.

  Specifically, when the effect pattern X1 to X3, Y1 to Y3, Z1 to Z3 is selected as the effect pattern type when the lottery result is 5R normal jackpot or out of focus, the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter Is 0 to 19, it is determined that the touch operation effect is not executed, and if the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 29, the jackpot expectation degree is “extremely low”. 1 is determined, and if the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 30 to 39, the touch operation effect A1-2 having the jackpot expectation level “low” is determined.

  When the lottery result is the 5R probability variation big hit or the 16R probability variation big hit, when the effect patterns X1 to X3, Y1 to Y3, and Z1 to Z3 are selected as the effect pattern types, the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is If it is 0 to 19, it is determined that the touch operation effect is not executed, and if the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 29, the jackpot expectation degree is “extremely low” touch operation effect A1-1. Is determined and the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 30 to 37, the touch operation effect A1-2 having the jackpot expectation level of “low” is determined, and the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is determined. Is 38, the touch operation effect A1-3 having the jackpot expectation degree of “medium” is determined, and if the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter is 39, the touch operation having the jackpot expectation degree of “high”. The effect A1-4 is determined.

  That is, in the first touch operation acceptance period R1, basically, no touch operation is performed, or a touch operation effect with a low jackpot expectation degree of “extremely low” or “low” is determined regardless of the lottery result. If the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot, the touch operation effect with the jackpot expectation level “medium” or “high” is determined with a low probability. In other words, when the touch operation is performed in the first touch operation acceptance period R1 of the high-speed change effect, the touch operation as the back button effect is performed unless the lottery result is a big hit and the selection is made with a low probability. As an effect, it is difficult to execute a touch operation effect with a high expectation of a big hit. Therefore, it is difficult to determine the lottery result by the touch operation during the first touch operation acceptance period R1 in the high-speed fluctuation effect.

  FIG. 33B shows a touch operation executed when the touch operation is performed in the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect A (see FIG. 32A). It is a diagram showing an example of a touch operation effect selection table A2 for determining an effect. In the touch operation effect selection table A2, the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is “touch” according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability jackpot, 16R probability jackpot, and deviation). "Operation effect A2-1" to "touch operation effect A2-4" and "no touch operation effect" are set.

  “Touch operation effect A2-1” has a low jackpot expectation degree, “touch operation effect A2-2” has a jackpot expectation degree of “medium”, and “touch operation effect A3-3” has a jackpot expectation degree. Is "high", and "touch operation effect A2-4" is "big hit confirmation". With "no touch operation effect", the touch operation effect is not executed even if the touch operation is performed in the second touch operation acceptance period R2. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation effect in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 needs to be determined, the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is determined by the lottery result. Select according to.

  Specifically, if the effect pattern Y1 to Y3 or Z1 to Z3 is selected as the effect pattern type when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot or a miss, the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 29. If so, it is determined that the touch operation effect is not executed, and if the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 30 to 49, the touch operation effect A2-1 having the jackpot expectation level of "low" is determined, If the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 50 to 59, the touch operation effect A2-2 with the jackpot expectation degree of "medium" is determined.

  Moreover, when the effect patterns Y1 to Y3 and Z1 to Z3 are selected as the effect pattern types when the lottery result is the 5R probability varying jackpot or the 16R probability varying jackpot, the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 19. If there is, it is determined that the touch operation effect is not executed, and if the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 39, the touch operation effect A2-1 having the jackpot expectation degree of "low" is determined, and If the counter value of the two-touch operation effect type counter is 40 to 54, the touch operation effect A2-2 having the jackpot expectation degree of "medium" is determined, and the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 55 to 57. If so, the touch operation effect A2-3 having the jackpot expectation level of "high" is determined, and if the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter is 58 or 59, the touch operation effect A2-4 of "jackpot determination". Is determined.

  That is, in the second touch operation acceptance period R2, regardless of the lottery result, there is basically no touch operation, or a relatively low jackpot expectation touch operation effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is “low” or “medium”. When it is determined and the lottery result is the probability variation jackpot, the touch operation effect with the jackpot expectation level “high” or “jackpot confirmed” is determined with a low probability. In other words, when the touch operation is performed in the second touch operation reception period R2 of the normal reach effect and the super reach effect, the back button effect is selected unless the lottery result is a big hit and the selection is made with a low probability. As the touch operation effect as above, it is difficult to execute the touch operation effect with a high jackpot expectation degree including the jackpot determination. Therefore, even in the second touch operation reception period R2 of the normal reach effect and the super reach effect, it is difficult to determine the lottery result by the touch operation, except when the big hit confirmation touch operation effect is executed.

  FIG. 34A shows a touch operation executed when the touch operation is performed in the third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect B (see FIG. 32B). It is a diagram showing an example of a touch operation effect selection table B1 for determining an effect. In the touch operation effect selection table B1, according to the lottery result (5R normal big hit, 5R probability change big hit, 16R probability change big hit, and out), as a touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter, “touch "Operation effect B1-1" to "touch operation effect B1-5" are set. In addition, in the touch operation effect selection table B1, "no touch operation effect" is not set, and by performing the touch operation in the third touch operation acceptance period R3, "touch operation effect B1-1" to "touch" are always performed. One of the touch operation effects "operation effect B1-5" is executed.

  “Touch operation effect B1-1” has a low jackpot expectation degree, “touch operation effect B1-2” has a high jackpot expectation degree, and “touch operation effect B1-3” has a jackpot expectation degree. Is “high”, the jackpot expectation degree of “touch operation effect B1-4” is “extremely high”, and “touch operation effect B1-5” is “big hit confirmation”. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that it is necessary to determine the touch operation effect in the third touch operation acceptance period R3, the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is randomly selected. Select according to.

  Specifically, when the lottery result is 5R normal jackpot or out of place, when the effect patterns Y1 to Y3 and Z1 to Z3 are selected as the effect pattern types, the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 39. If so, the touch operation effect B1-1 having the jackpot expectation degree of “low” is determined, and if the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 40 to 69, the touch operation having the jackpot expectation degree of “medium”. The effect B1-2 is determined, and if the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 70 to 79, the touch operation effect B1-3 having the jackpot expectation level “high” is determined.

  When the effect pattern Y1 to Y3, Z1 to Z3 is selected as the effect pattern type when the lottery result is the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot, the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 19. If so, the touch operation effect B1-1 having the jackpot expectation degree of “low” is determined, and if the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 39, the touch operation effect having the jackpot expectation degree of “medium”. If B1-2 is determined and the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 40 to 69, the touch operation effect B1-3 whose jackpot expectation is “high” is determined and the third touch operation effect type counter is determined. If the counter value of 70 to 77, the big hit expectation degree is determined to be the touch operation effect B1-4 having a "high intensity", and if the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter is 78 or 79, "the big hit is confirmed. The touch operation effect B1-5 is determined.

  That is, in the third touch operation acceptance period R3, a touch operation effect having a jackpot expectation of “high” or higher is relatively easy to be selected, and particularly when the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot expectation is “high”. The touch operation effects described above are easily selected. In other words, when the touch operation is performed in the third touch operation reception period R3 of the super reach effect, the touch operation effect having the jackpot expectation level of “high” or higher is relatively easy to be executed, and particularly the lottery result changes suddenly. When it is a big hit, a touch operation effect with a big hit expectation degree of “high” or higher is easily executed. Therefore, in the third touch operation acceptance period R3 of the super reach effect, the lottery result can be more easily predicted by the touch operation than in the first touch operation acceptance period R1 and the second touch operation acceptance period R2 for the touch operation effect A.

  FIG. 34B shows a touch operation executed when the touch operation is performed in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect B (see FIG. 32B). It is a diagram showing an example of a touch operation effect selection table B2 for determining an effect. In the touch operation effect selection table B2, the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is “touch” according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability jackpot, 16R probability jackpot, and deviation). "Operation effect B2-1" to "touch operation effect B2-5" are set. In addition, in the touch operation effect selection table B2, "no touch operation effect" is not set, and by performing the touch operation in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4, "touch operation effect B2-1" to "touch" are always performed. One of the touch operation effects "operation effect B2-5" is executed.

  “Touch operation effect B2-1” has a low jackpot expectation degree, “touch operation effect B2-2” has a jackpot expectation degree of “medium”, and “touch operation effect B2-3” has a jackpot expectation degree. Is “high”, the jackpot expectation degree of “touch operation effect B2-4” is “extremely high”, and “touch operation effect B2-5” is “big hit confirmation”. When the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 needs to be determined, the touch operation effect type corresponding to the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is determined by the lottery result. Select according to.

  Specifically, when the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 are selected as the effect pattern types when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot or a win, if the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 59, it is a jackpot. The touch operation effect B2-1 having the expectation level “low” is determined, and if the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 60 to 89, the touch operation effect B2-2 having the jackpot expectation degree “medium”. Is determined, and if the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 90 to 99, the touch operation effect B1-3 having a high jackpot expectation degree of “high” is determined.

  Further, when the effect pattern Z1 to Z3 is selected as the effect pattern type when the lottery result is the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 16R probability variation jackpot, if the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 0 to 19, the jackpot expectation is expected. The touch operation effect B2-1 whose degree is “low” is determined, and when the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is 20 to 59, the touch operation effect B2-2 whose jackpot expectation degree is “medium” is determined. If the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is determined to be 60 to 84, the touch operation effect B2-3 having the jackpot expectation level of “high” is determined, and the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter is determined. In the case of 85 to 94, the touch operation effect B2-4 having the jackpot expectation degree of “super high” is determined, and in the case of the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter being 95 to 99, the touch of “jacket determination”. Operation effect B2-5 is determined.

  That is, in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4, a touch operation effect having a jackpot expectation of “high” or higher is likely to be selected, and particularly when the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot expectation is “high” or higher. Touch operation effects are easily selected. In other words, when the touch operation is performed in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 of the special reach effect, the touch operation effect having the jackpot expectation level of “high” or more is likely to be executed, and particularly the lottery result is a sudden change jackpot. In this case, a touch operation effect with a jackpot expectation of “high” or higher is likely to be executed. Therefore, in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 of the special reach effect, the lottery result is most easily predicted by the touch operation in all the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4.

<Step S2301>
Returning to the description of FIG. 31, in step S2301, the MPU 51 determines whether the effect pattern determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23 is a non-reach effect pattern. Here, when the effect pattern is the non-reach effect pattern (step S2301: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect determination process. That is, when the effect pattern is the non-reach effect pattern (step S2301: Yes), the MPU 51 does not execute the touch operation effect. Of course, the touch operation effect may be executed when the effect pattern is the non-reach effect pattern. On the other hand, when the effect pattern is not the non-reach effect pattern (step S2301: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2302.

<Step S2302>
In step S2302, the MPU 51 determines the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect A. That is, when the effect pattern is not the non-reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 can determine that the effect pattern is one of the normal reach effect pattern, the super reach effect pattern, and the special reach effect pattern, and the first touch operation acceptance period R1 exists. Therefore, the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 is determined.

  Specifically, the MPU 51, based on the touch operation effect selection table A1 (see FIG. 33A), the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and the touch operation effect corresponding to the counter value of the first touch operation effect type counter. To decide. Then, the MPU 51 sets the determined touch operation effect type in the RAM 512 as a display variation pattern command together with information indicating that the touch operation effect is for the first touch operation acceptance period R1. When it is determined that the touch operation effect is not executed when the touch operation is performed in the first touch operation acceptance period R1, the display variation pattern command includes “no touch operation effect” as the touch operation effect type. May be set as, or information regarding the touch operation effect for the first touch operation reception period R1 may not be included.

<Step S2303>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 determines whether the effect pattern determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23 is a normal reach effect pattern. Here, when the effect pattern is the normal reach effect pattern (step S2303: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect determination process. That is, when the effect pattern is the normal reach effect pattern (step S2303: Yes), the MPU 51 does not determine the touch operation effect for the second to fourth touch operation accepting periods R2 to R4 and does not determine the first touch operation accepting period R1. Only the touch operation effect for is determined. On the other hand, when the effect pattern is not the normal reach effect pattern (step S2303: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2304.

<Steps S2304 and S2305>
When the effect pattern is not the non-reach effect pattern or the normal reach effect pattern (step S2303: No), the MPU 51 performs the touch operation effect in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect A. The touch operation effect is determined (step S2304), and the touch operation effect in the third touch operation acceptance period R3 (see FIG. 27) for executing the touch operation effect B is determined (step S2305). That is, when the effect pattern is neither the non-reach effect pattern nor the normal reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 determines that the effect pattern is either the super reach effect pattern or the special reach effect pattern, and the second touch operation acceptance period R2 and the third touch. Since it can be determined that the operation acceptance period R3 exists, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 and the touch operation effect in the third touch operation acceptance period R3 are determined.

  Specifically, the MPU 51, based on the touch operation effect selection table A2 (see FIG. 33(B)), according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the counter value of the second touch operation effect type counter, the second A touch operation effect for the touch operation reception period R2 is determined. Then, the MPU 51 sets the determined touch operation effect type in the RAM 512 as a display variation pattern command together with information indicating that the touch operation effect is for the second touch operation acceptance period R2. In addition, when it is determined not to execute the touch operation effect when the touch operation is performed in the second touch operation acceptance period R2, the display variation pattern command includes “no touch operation effect” as the touch operation effect type. May be set as, or information regarding the touch operation effect for the second touch operation reception period R2 may not be included.

  Further, the MPU 51 accepts the third touch operation according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the counter value of the third touch operation effect type counter, based on the touch operation effect selection table B1 (see FIG. 34(A)). The touch operation effect for the period R3 is determined. Then, the MPU 51 sets the determined touch operation effect type in the RAM 512 as a display variation pattern command together with information indicating that the touch operation effect is for the third touch operation acceptance period R3.

<Step S2306>
In step S2306, the MPU 51 determines whether the effect pattern determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. 23 is a super reach effect pattern. Here, when the effect pattern is the super reach effect pattern (step S2306: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect determination process. That is, when the effect pattern is the super reach effect pattern (step S2306: Yes), the MPU 51 does not determine the touch operation effect for the fourth touch operation accepting period R4, and first to third touch operation accepting periods R1 to R1. The touch operation reception effect for R3 is determined. On the other hand, when the effect pattern is not the super reach effect pattern (step S2306: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2307.

<Step S2307>
When the effect pattern is not a non-reach effect pattern, a normal reach effect pattern, or a super reach effect pattern (step S2307: No), the MPU 51 causes the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 for executing the touch operation effect B (see FIG. 27). ) Touch operation effect is determined (step S2307). That is, since the MPU 51 can determine that the effect pattern is the special reach effect pattern when the effect pattern is not the non-reach effect pattern, the normal reach effect pattern, or the super reach effect pattern, and the fourth touch operation reception period R4 exists. , A touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is determined.

  Specifically, the MPU 51, based on the touch operation effect selection table B2 (see FIG. 34B), according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the counter value of the fourth touch operation effect type counter, the fourth. The touch operation effect for the touch operation reception period R4 is determined. Then, the MPU 51 sets the determined touch operation effect type in the RAM 512 as a display variation pattern command together with information indicating that the touch operation effect is for the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4.

  The touch operation effect type for the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R4 may be set in the RAM 512 as a command different from the display variation pattern command.

[Variable game production processing]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 17, in the variable game effect process (step S1707), the movable accessory member 39 determined when the variable pattern command is received in the command determination process in the variable game that notifies the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. The movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timing (step S2204 in FIG. 23), and the touch operation effect (step S2205 in FIG. 23) determined when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. , The speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like. Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game effect process executed in step S1707 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Steps S2401 and S2402>
As shown in FIG. 35, the MPU 51 confirms the counter value of the fluctuation counter (step S2401) and determines whether the counter value of the fluctuation counter is 0 (step S2402). Here, MPU51, when the counter value of the fluctuation counter is 0 (step S2402: Yes), because it can be determined that the symbol is not changing, the fluctuation game control process is ended, and the counter value of the fluctuation counter is not 0. (Step S2402: No), the process proceeds to step S2403.

<Step S2403>
In step S2403, the MPU 51 executes a movable accessory member operation process. In the movable accessory member operation process, when the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 to 30) of the movable accessory member 39 are determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, the movable accessory member is operated. The member 39 is activated. The details of the movable accessory member operating process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

<Step S2404>
In step S2404, the MPU 51 executes touch operation effect execution processing. In the touch operation effect execution process, when a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (see FIG. 27). In addition, except when the execution of the touch operation effect is limited, the touch operation effect is executed. The details of the touch operation effect execution processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
Here, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation process executed in the variable game effect process of FIG. In the movable accessory member operation process, the movable accessory member 39 is moved from the standby position (first position) to the operation position at the operation timing determined in the movable accessory member operation timing determination process (step S2204 of the command determination process in FIG. 23). (2nd position) and from the operating position to the standby position.

<Step S2501>
As shown in FIG. 36, in step S2501, the MPU 51 determines the operation timings G1 to G6 of the movable accessory member 39 determined in the movable accessory member operation timing determination processing (step S2204 of the command determination processing in FIG. 23) (FIG. 27 to FIG. 30), it is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the start time is reached. Here, when it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2502, and when it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2501: No). The process moves to step S2504.

<Steps S2502 and S2503>
When it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 outputs an operation start signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39. (Step S2502). Accordingly, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a to move the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position. Then, the MPU 51 sets the movable accessory member member in-operation flag to ON (step S2503), and ends the movable accessory member member operation process.

<Step S2504>
When it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504). That is, the MPU 51 ends the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 to 30) of the movable accessory member 39 determined in the movable accessory member operation timing determination processing (step S2204 of the command determination processing in FIG. 23). It is determined whether or not the value equivalent to is reached. Here, when it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2505, and when it is not the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504: No), the processing. To step S2506.

<Step S2505>
If it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504: Yes), the MPU 51 outputs a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504). (S2505), the movable accessory member operating process is ended. As a result, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a to move the movable accessory member 39 from the operating position to the standby position.

<Steps S2506 and S2507>
When it is not the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2504: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position based on the detection signal from the return detection unit 39b ( Step S2506). Here, when the movable accessory member 39 returns to the standby position (step S2506: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the movable accessory member in-operation flag to off (step S2507), and performs the movable accessory member operation process. finish. When the movable accessory member 39 has not returned to the standby position (step S2506: No), the MPU 51 ends the movable accessory member operating process.

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed in the variable game effect process of FIG.

<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 37, whether or not a touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d based on the first to third touch operation pattern flags (a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (on the panel 25). It is determined whether or not an object exists in a specific area). Specifically, the MPU 51 touches when the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21 is “OFF”, “ON”, and “OFF”. It is determined that the operation state corresponds to the touch operation start, and when the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags is “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, the touch operation state corresponds to the touch operation continuation. It is determined (see FIG. 22(B)). It should be noted that the fact that an object exists in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 in this step S2601 does not mean whether or not a touch operation is actually performed by the player, but in all of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. This means that the presence of an object is detected. Therefore, even when the movable accessory member 39 is operated, it is determined that an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, and the detection of the object by the movable accessory member 39 is erroneously detected as a touch operation. There is.

  Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2602, and the touch operation is performed by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. When it is not determined that it is detected (step S2601: No), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S2602>
In step S2602, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag which is set to ON in step S2503 in the movable accessory member operating process of FIG. 36 is set to ON. Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S2602: No), the MPU 51 is in one of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (see FIG. 27). Under the condition, the touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23) is displayed on the display control device 6. It is transmitted (steps S2603 to S2610 described later), and the touch operation effect is executed.

  On the other hand, when the movable accessory member in-operation flag is set to ON (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process. That is, in the present embodiment, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, even if the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to Even if it is R4, the detection result of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d is ignored by ending the touch operation effect execution process when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON.

  Here, the movable accessory member operating flag is turned on when the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 is reached and an operation start signal for operating the movable accessory member 39 is output to the motor driver 39c. Since it is set (steps S2501 to S2503 in FIG. 36), the movable accessory member 39 is not operating and is in the standby position at the stage when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. On the other hand, since the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF when the return detecting unit 39b detects the return to the standby position (steps S2506 and S2507 in FIG. 36), the movable accessory member operating flag is set. The movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position at the stage in which it is set to off. That is, from the stage at which it is decided to operate the movable accessory member 39 (the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started), the movable accessory member 39 is started. Is confirmed and the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position, the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, and the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored. Therefore, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, even if the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, that Regardless of whether the touch operation is performed by the player or the operation of the movable accessory member 39, the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored, and even if the first to fourth touches are performed. Even in the operation reception periods R1 to R4, the touch operation effect is not executed.

<Steps S2603 and S2604>
In step S2603, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 can be determined by, for example, referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1. You may judge by operating a counter.

  Here, when the MPU 51 is in the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S2603: Yes), the first touch operation production for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation production in the first touch operation reception period R1. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2604), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 is executed on the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is not in the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S2603: NO), the process proceeds to step S2605.

<Steps S2605 and S2606>
In step S2605, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and also for determining whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2. You may judge by operating a counter.

  Here, when the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S2605: Yes), the second touch operation production for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation production in the second touch operation reception period R2. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2606), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 is executed on the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 is not in the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S2605: No), the process proceeds to step S2607.

<Steps S2607 and S2608>
In step S2607, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3 can be determined by, for example, referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3. You may judge by operating a counter.

  Here, when the MPU 51 is in the third touch operation acceptance period R3 (step S2607: Yes), the third touch operation effect for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the third touch operation acceptance period R3. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2608), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 is executed on the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, when it is not the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S2607: NO), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2609.

<Steps S2609 and S2610>
In step S2609, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 can be determined by, for example, referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and is also used to determine whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4. You may judge by operating a counter.

  Here, when the MPU 51 is in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (step S2609: Yes), the fourth touch operation effect for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2610), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 is executed on the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, when it is not the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S2609: No), the MPU 51 can determine that it does not correspond to any of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, and thus executes the touch operation effect. Without that, the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

[Big hit game production processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 17, in the jackpot game effect process (step S1708), in the jackpot game, for example, when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process, the jackpot game effect (opening effect, opening/closing execution mode effect and ending). The effect is performed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the electric decoration unit 27, and the like.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, as in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as a variable game effect, a movable accessory member actuation effect for activating a movable accessory member, and a symbol display unit within a touch operation acceptance period. There is one in which a touch operation effect is executed by a player performing a touch operation on the front side. In this type of gaming machine, due to the operation of the movable accessory member within the touch operation reception period, the touch operation effect may be unexpectedly executed as if the touch operation was performed. That is, the operation of the movable accessory member may be erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player, so that the touch operation effect may be executed.

  Further, in the touch operation reception period, there may be a case where a touch operation reception effect that clearly indicates that it is a touch operation reception period is executed, and there is a case where it is not executed. Touch operation is performed during the touch operation reception period when the touch operation reception effect is not executed. The touch operation effect when the operation is performed is not generally high in jackpot expectation. On the other hand, the movable accessory member operation effect is often executed as a chance-up effect or a big hit confirmation effect. Therefore, when the movable accessory member operates, the expectation for the jackpot is increased, or when it is clearly indicated that the jackpot is a big hit, the touch operation effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed due to the operation of the movable accessory member. Being given may cause a decline in interest.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, that is, at the stage when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member 39 (the movable accessory member). From the stage where the movable accessory member is in the standby position immediately before the operation of 39 is started) to the stage where the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed and the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position. The execution of the touch operation effect is limited by ignoring the detection results of the detection sensors 38a to 38d. Therefore, even if the movable accessory member member 39 starts to operate after the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, execution of the touch operation effect can be restricted, and the movable accessory member 39 is of course in the standby position. It is also possible to limit the execution of the touch operation effect before returning to. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is executed because the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player. Can be prevented. Therefore, since the expectation for the jackpot is increased by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, or the touch operation effect having a low jackpot expectation is not executed in the state where the jackpot is clearly shown, it is interesting. It can suppress the decline.

[Other Embodiments]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. Further, in the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration and the same steps as the processing procedure of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment will be omitted. It should be noted that the configurations and processing functions of the above-described first embodiment and other embodiments described below may be selected and combined arbitrarily.

[Second Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, when the presence of an object is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, that is, the movable accessory member 39 is From the stage where it is decided to operate (the stage where the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started), the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed and the movable accessory Up to the stage where the member 39 is at the standby position, the case where the detection results of the objects by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored and execution of the touch operation effect is limited has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, that is, at the stage when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member (immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member is started). Until the return of the movable accessory member is confirmed, the processing for determining whether or not the presence of an object is detected by the plurality of detection sensors is not executed, which is different from the first embodiment. .

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 38, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, unlike the touch operation effect execution process of the first embodiment described above, whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. It is determined first (step S2701), and on the condition that the movable accessory member in-operation flag is set to OFF (step S2701: No), it is determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. Based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22B), it is determined whether or not a touch operation is detected (step S2702). Then, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected (step S2702: YES), the MPU 51 performs the operation in any one of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 as in the first embodiment described above. In some cases (Yes in any of steps S2603, S2605, S2607, and S2609), the touch operation effect execution command in the corresponding touch operation reception period R1 to R4 is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2604, S2606, S2608 or S2610).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, that is, at the stage when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member 39 (operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started. (Immediately before being performed) until the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed (step S2701: YES), regardless of whether a touch operation is performed by the player or the movable accessory member 39 is operated. The process of determining whether or not an object exists on the front side of the predetermined area of the symbol display unit 341 (step S2702) is not executed. As a result, the touch operation effect is not executed while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. Therefore, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory member is erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player, and thus the touch operation effect is executed. It can be prevented. As a result, the expectation for the jackpot is increased by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, or the touch operation effect with a low jackpot expectation is not executed in the state in which it is clearly indicated that the jackpot is interesting. Can be suppressed.

[Third Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, when the movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON (a stage in which it is determined to operate the movable accessory member 39 (operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started. (Immediately before the time) until the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed), the case where the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is limited has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the one-shot notification effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result is a big hit is executed with the operation of the movable accessory member, the execution timing of the one-shot notification effect (touch operation by the detection sensor is performed. It is different from the above-described first embodiment in that execution of the touch operation effect is restricted depending on the situation (determined to be present). Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the execution timing of the one-shot notification effect is the execution of the super reach effect or the special reach effect, the execution of the touch operation effect is limited. Further, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted, an effect (specific effect) different from the touch operation effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect, which is the same as the first embodiment. Is different. The specific effect may be an effect showing the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result, or may be an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40 focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a touch operation effect execution process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the present embodiment. 40A is a diagram showing an example of the specific effect determination table referred to in the touch operation effect execution process of FIG. 39, and FIG. 40B is set in the specific effect determination table of FIG. 40A. It is a figure which shows the expectation degree (the jackpot expectation degree) that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the specific effect is a jackpot.

<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 39, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2801). The effect execution command is a command for executing the touch operation effect or the specific effect on the symbol display unit 341, and is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S2810 or S2811 described below. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is such that the transmitted flag is set to ON when the touch effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S2810 or S2811, which will be described later. Then, it can be determined by checking whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON. Note that it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect and the specific effect from being repeatedly started by determining whether or not the effect execution flag has been transmitted in step S2801. However, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected after the end of the touch operation effect or the specific effect (when it is determined that an object exists in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341), the touch operation acceptance period is set. The touch operation effect and the specific effect may be executed again on the condition that there is such a condition.

  Here, when the MPU 51 has already transmitted the effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S2801: Yes), the touch operation effect execution process is terminated, and the effect execution command has not been transmitted to the display control device 6. (Step S2801: No), the process proceeds to step S2802.

<Step S2802>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2801: No), the MPU 51 combines the first to third touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination processing of FIG. 21 (FIG. 22). Based on (B)), it is determined whether or not the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S2802). Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S2802: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2803, and the touch operation is performed by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. When it is not determined that it is detected (step S2802: No), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S2803>
In step S2803, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the first touch operation acceptance period R1 is determined based on, for example, the value of the variation counter and the variation type (effect pattern) determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. Note that, in the following, also in the case of determining whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 to the fourth touch operation reception period R4, similarly, the value of the fluctuation counter and the step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. It is determined based on the determined variation type (effect pattern).

  Here, if the MPU 51 is in the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S2803: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2811, and if it is not the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S2803: No), the process is stepped. It moves to S2804.

<Step S2804>
When it is not the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S2803: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27) (step S2804). Here, if the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S2804: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2805, and if it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S2804: No), the process is stepped. The process moves to S2806.

<Step S2805>
When it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S2804: YES), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the super reach effect is being executed (step S2805). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the second touch operation reception period R2 is a reception period when the normal reach effect is being executed or a reception period when the super reach effect is being executed. Whether or not the super reach effect is being executed is determined based on, for example, the value of the variation counter and the variation type (effect pattern) determined in step S2203 in the command determination process of FIG. Here, if the MPU 51 is executing the super reach effect (step S2805: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2807, and if the super reach effect is not being executed (step S2805: No), the process proceeds to step S2811. Transition.

<Step S2806>
When it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S2804: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the third touch operation reception period R3 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S2806). If the MPU 51 is in the third touch operation reception period R3 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S2806: YES), the process proceeds to step S2807, and the third touch operation reception period R3 or the fourth touch. When it is not the operation reception period R4 (step S2807: No), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S2807>
If it is the second touch operation acceptance period R2 during execution of the super reach effect (step S2807: Yes), or if it is either the third touch operation acceptance period R3 or the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (step S2806: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag which is set to ON in step S2503 in the movable accessory member operation process of FIG. 36 is set to ON. Here, when the movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON (step S2807: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2808, and the movable accessory member member-in-operation flag is set to OFF. In that case (step S2807: NO), the process proceeds to step S2811.

<Step S2808>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S2807: Yes), the MPU 51 clearly indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit due to the operation of the movable accessory member 39. It is determined whether an effect is executed (step S2808). Here, when the one-shot notification effect is performed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2808: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2809, and the one-shot notification effect is performed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39. Is not executed (step S2809: NO), the process proceeds to step S2811.

<Step S2809>
When the one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (step S2809: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the specific effect determination process (step S2810). That is, when the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d during the execution of the super reach effect or the special reach effect, the touch operation effect determination process (command determination process of FIG. 23 is performed. In order to execute the specific effect instead of executing the touch operation effect determined in step S2205), a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is determined in the specific effect determination process of step S2809. The specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (a jackpot expectation degree) or an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result, but in the present embodiment, an effect indicating the jackpot expectation degree Run as.

  Here, FIG. 40(A) is a diagram showing an example of the specific effect determination table referred to in the specific effect determination process executed in step S2809 in the touch operation effect execution process of FIG. 39, and FIG. 40(B) is a diagram. It is a figure which shows the jackpot expectation degree of the specific effect set by the specific effect determination table of 40(A).

  As shown in FIG. 40(A), in the specific effect determination table, the identification corresponding to the counter value of the specific effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and deviation). "Specific effect A1" to "specific effect A3", "determined effect A", "determined effect B", and "premier effect" are defined as effect pattern types. As shown in FIG. 40(B), "specific effect A1" is an effect whose jackpot expectation is "medium", "specific effect A2" is an effect whose jackpot expectation is "high", and "specific" "Production A3" is a production in which the jackpot expectation is "extremely high".

  “Final confirmation effect A” is an image effect of “big hit confirmation” executed on the symbol display unit 341. The image effect as the final effect A is, for example, an effect executed at a position where the movable accessory member 39 is invisible or difficult to visually recognize when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position. In this case, the fixed effect A can be visually confirmed by the movable accessory member returning to the standby position. Therefore, by including the fixed effect A as the specific effect, not only whether or not the movable accessory member 39 is operated, but the fixed effect is displayed on the pattern display portion 341 for the player after the movable accessory member 39 is returned. It is possible to focus on whether or not it is executed. As a result, the player can continue to have an interest in the effect even after the end of the movable accessory member effect, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  The “determined effect B” is an effect other than the “big hit fixed” image effect, and is, for example, a sound output effect of outputting a notification sound or a notification voice of the jackpot determination from the speaker 26, or a mode of jackpot determination (for example, lighting by rainbow). A lamp effect of lighting the illuminated portion 27 and a movable accessory member actuation effect of activating the movable accessory member 39 can be considered. In addition, in step S2802, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, the movable accessory member 39 is immediately activated again after the movable accessory member 39 is returned to the standby position. It is possible. In this case, since the fixed effect B is executed as the second movable accessory member operation effect of the continuously executed movable accessory member operation effect, the fixed effect B is executed as an unexpected effect. Further, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the movable accessory member 39 is activated again after the movable accessory member 39 is returned. As a result, the player can continue to have an interest in the effect even after the end of the movable accessory member effect, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  "Premier production" is a production of "probably strange jackpot confirmed". Further, the "premier effect" is an effect having an extremely low selection rate as compared with other effects, and in the present embodiment, it is selected only when the lottery result is a probability variation big hit, and the selection rate is 1%. For example, as the “premier effect”, an image effect in which an image of a rare character whose appearance rate is extremely low compared to other characters is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 can be considered.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 40(A), when the lottery result is the 5R normal jackpot, any one of the specific effects A1 to A3, the fixed effect A and the fixed effect B is selected according to the counter value of the specific effect type counter. However, the premiere production is not selected. In addition, when the lottery result is the 5R normal jackpot, the fixed effect A and the fixed effect B can be selected, but the selection rate is low.

  When the lottery result is the 5R probability variation jackpot, any one of the specific effects A1 to A3, the fixed effect A and the fixed effect B is selected according to the counter value of the specific effect type counter, but the premium effect is selected. There is no. Moreover, when the lottery result is the 5R probability variation jackpot, the fixed effect A and the fixed effect are easier to be selected than the 5R normal jackpot.

  When the lottery result is the 16R probability variation jackpot, any of the specific effects A1 to A3, the final effect A, the final effect B, and the premium effect is selected according to the counter value of the specific effect type counter. In addition, when the lottery result is a 16R certainty variation jackpot, the effect that determines the jackpot including the premiere effect is more easily selected than the 5R regular jackpot, but the selection rate is the same as the 5R certainty variation jackpot, and there is a low probability that the premium effect Is selected.

  When the result of the lottery is wrong, one of the specific effects A1 to A3 is selected according to the counter value of the specific effect type counter, and the final effect A, the final effect B and the premium effect are not selected. Further, if the lottery result is out of alignment, it is easy to select the specific effect A whose jackpot expectation is "medium", and the specific effect B whose jackpot expectation is "high" and the specific effect C which is "extremely high". The selectivity is low.

<Step S2810>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 39, in step S2810, the MPU 51 sets a specific effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the specific effect determined in step S2809, and transmits it to the display control device 6. Thereby, the specific effect is executed in the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S2811>
In step S2811, the MPU 51 determines that a touch operation has been detected (when an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341), touch operation effect determination processing (FIG. A touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in step S2205) in the command determination processing of 23 is transmitted to the display control device 6. As a result, the display control device 6 determines that a touch operation has been detected (based on the detection of the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) (step S2802:: Yes). ), and causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect.

  Specifically, the display control device 6 displays an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 during the first touch operation reception period R1 or the second touch operation reception period R2 during execution of the normal reach effect by the MPU 51. When it is determined whether or not it exists, a touch operation effect determined in advance is executed. That is, in the normal reach effect, the touch operation effect is executed and the specific effect is not executed. In the first touch operation acceptance period R1, the touch operation effect determined in advance is always executed.

  On the other hand, the display control device 6 performs the second touch operation reception period R2 and the third touch operation during the execution of the super reach effect by the MPU 51 on condition that the one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39. When it is determined that the touch operation state corresponds to the touch operation start in the reception period R3 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect determined in advance. That is, in the super reach effect and the special reach effect, when the one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, the specific effect is executed, and the touch operation effect is not executed. In other words, when the one-shot notification effect is executed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 in the super reach effect or the special reach effect, the touch operation during the period for accepting the touch operation capable of executing the touch operation. Execution of production is restricted. Further, in the third touch operation reception period R3 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4 in which the touch operation reception effect is executed, the specific effect is always executed instead of the touch operation effect.

  As described above, in the conventional game machine in which the movable accessory member operation effect and the touch operation effect are executed, the operation of the movable accessory member is erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player, Touch operation effects may be executed. Here, the movable accessory member operation effect may be executed as a one-shot notification effect that clearly indicates a big hit. In particular, in the super reach effect and the special reach effect, it is often executed as a jackpot fixed effect as compared with the normal reach effect. On the other hand, the touch operation effect often includes an effect in which the lottery result can hardly be expected to be a big hit. Therefore, when it is erroneously detected that the player's touch operation is performed on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion due to the operation of the movable accessory member, one notification is issued by the operation of the movable accessory member. Even if the production is being performed, immediately after that, when a production that is hardly expected to be a big hit is executed, it is feared that the player may suddenly lose interest in the game.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is almost impossible to expect a big hit when the one-shot notification production by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is executed in the super reach production or the special reach production. The specific effect is executed in place of the touch operation effect that may be executed as the effect. Here, as for the specific effect, as shown in FIG. 40(A) and FIG. 40(B), even in the specific effect A1 with the lowest expected jackpot, the expected jackpot is “medium”, and is mostly a jackpot. The production that cannot be expected is not included. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent an effect that can hardly be expected to be a big hit from being executed immediately after the one-shot notification effect is performed in the super reach effect or the special reach effect.

  By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, the touch operation effect is not executed even when the touch operation is confirmed while the movable accessory member 39 is operating. Further, in the above-described second embodiment, while the movable accessory member 39 is operating, the touch operation effect is not executed by not confirming the presence or absence of the touch operation. That is, in both the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the touch operation effect is not executed while the movable accessory member 39 is operating, regardless of the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39. .. However, in the early stage of the effect pattern, for example, in the normal reach effect, it is difficult to execute the effect with a high jackpot expectation. Therefore, it is not necessary to limit the execution of the touch operation effect in the high speed variation effect or the normal reach effect. In particular, it is not necessary to limit the execution of the touch operation effect by the touch operation in the first touch operation reception period R1.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the execution of the touch operation effect is not limited in the high speed fluctuation effect and the normal reach effect. Further, the execution of the touch operation effect is not limited in the first touch operation reception period R1. That is, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, execution of the touch operation effect may or may not be restricted depending on the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39. As a result, through the entire effect from the start of the variable display of the main symbol to the stop of the variable display, the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted at the timing when the interest in the game is likely to decrease, and at other timings. Since the touch operation effect is executed as scheduled, it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect from becoming meaningless.

  In the present embodiment, in the special reach effect pattern, execution of the touch operation effect is restricted in both the super reach effect and the special reach effect, but in the special reach effect pattern, the touch operation effect is performed only in the special reach effect. May be restricted in execution.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the touch operation is performed, the touch operation effect or the specific effect is immediately executed, but when it is determined that the touch operation is ended after it is determined that the touch operation is performed, A touch operation effect or a specific effect may be executed. For example. When it is determined that the touch operation is performed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, the touch operation effect or the specific effect may be executed after the movable accessory member 39 returns.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, when the gaming machine 10 includes one movable accessory member 39 and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the detection results of the four detection sensors 38a to 38d The case has been described where is ignored and execution of the touch operation effect is limited.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game machine is provided with two movable accessory members, the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted while one movable accessory member is operating, and the touch operation is performed while the other movable accessory member is operating. It is different from the first embodiment described above in that the execution of the effect is not limited. Further, the present embodiment is also different from the above-described first embodiment in that it determines whether or not the touch operation is performed by the two detection sensors.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 49, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

  Here, FIG. 41 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment. 42 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a main movable accessory member 39A, a sub movable accessory member 39B, a first main detection sensor 38A, a second main detection sensor 38B, and a first main detection sensor 38B. The sub detection sensor 38C and the second sub detection sensor 38D are provided.

  The main movable accessory member 39A is a member similar to the movable accessory member 39 of the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, and a predetermined first standby position located above the symbol display portion 341. (Refer to FIG. 4) and between the second operating position (see FIG. 5) set below the first standby position, along the surface of the symbol display portion 341 by the driving force from the first motor 39a1. It can be moved vertically. The first motor 39a1 is controlled by the motor driver 39c based on control signals (operation start signal and return signal) from the MPU 51. In the present embodiment, the main movable accessory member 39A can be operated at the operation timings G2, G4, G6 among the operation timings G1 to G6 shown in FIG. Further, the coverage on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 when the main movable accessory member 39A is in the first operating position is the same as that of the symbol display portion 341 when the sub movable accessory member 39B is in the second operating position. Higher than the coverage on the front side. The operation frequency of the main movable accessory member 39A is higher than that of the sub movable accessory member 39B.

  The sub movable accessory member 39B is the second motor between the second standby position and the second operating position from the center of the symbol display unit 341 on the right side of the second standby position in the left side region of the symbol display unit 341. It is possible to move in the left-right direction along the surface of the symbol display portion 341 by the driving force from 39a2. The second motor 39a2 is controlled by the motor driver 39c based on control signals (operation start signal and return signal) from the MPU 51. In the present embodiment, the sub movable accessory member 39B can be operated at the operation timings G1, G3, G5 among the operation timings G1 to G6 shown in FIG.

  The sub movable accessory member 39B includes a display unit 391B including a liquid crystal display or a dot matrix display. That is, the sub movable accessory member 39 also has a function as a sub display. On the display unit 391B, for example, an effect linked to the variable game effect executed on the symbol display unit 341 is executed. Also, on the display unit 391B, a touch operation reception effect and a touch operation effect are executed. The display content on the display unit 391B is controlled by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 based on the variable display command transmitted from the MPU 51.

  Note that among the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 illustrated in FIG. 27, the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3 are touch operations performed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. It is a period in which the display unit 391B accepts a touch operation for executing the effect, and the second touch operation acceptance period R2 and the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 are the touch operation for executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341. It is a period accepted by the symbol display unit 341. Further, in the third touch operation reception period R3 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4, a touch operation reception effect that clearly indicates the touch operation reception period is executed.

  The first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B detect the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341, and are optical sensors such as a diffuse reflection sensor. The first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B detect the presence of an object based on, for example, a change in the amount of reflected light that is received. The first main detection sensor 38A is arranged on the upper right side of the symbol display portion 341, and the second main detection sensor 38B is arranged in the central portion of the symbol display portion 341 from the left side. The range in which the existence can be detected is different.

  Here, FIG. 43 is a front view schematically showing the detection ranges of the main detection sensors 38A and 38D with respect to the symbol display portion 341 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. Specifically, FIG. 43(A) shows the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A (the cross-hatched portion in the drawing), and FIG. 43(B) shows the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B ( FIG. 43C shows an overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B (cross hatching in the figure). Part).

  As shown in FIG. 43(A), the first main detection sensor 38A detects the presence of an object in the area excluding the lower portion and the upper right portion of the symbol display portion 341 based on the change in the amount of reflected light received. ..

  As shown in FIG. 43(B), the second main detection sensor 38B is based on a change in the amount of reflected light that is received, the left part of the symbol display part 341 (the operating region of the sub movable accessory member 39B) and the right part. Detects the presence of objects in the area except the bottom.

  As shown in FIG. 43C, the overlapping range between the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A (see FIG. 42A) and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B (see FIG. 42B) is The left part of the symbol display part 341 (the operating region of the sub movable accessory member 39B), the lower part, the upper right part, and the lower right part are excluded. In this overlapping area, the left portion (the operation area of the sub movable accessory member 39B) and the lower portion of the symbol display portion 341 are not within the detection range, and thus it is erroneous that the player has performed a touch operation with the game ball passing through the warp, for example. It can be prevented from being detected. In the overlapping area, the left part of the symbol display portion 341 (the operation area of the sub movable accessory member 39B) is not within the detection range, so that, for example, a touch operation is performed on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection that a touch operation has been performed on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 when the touch panel is broken. Therefore, in the present embodiment, an object in an overlapping range between the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A (see FIG. 42(A)) and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B (see FIG. 42(B)). By detecting the presence, it is determined whether or not a touch operation has been performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. That is, when the presence of an object is detected by both the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B, the MPU 51 touches a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Judge that the operation was performed.

  Of course, when one of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B detects the object, it may be determined that the object exists on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Further, the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are not limited to the periphery of the symbol display portion 341, but may be arranged in the peripheral portion of the symbol display portion 341. Further, the number of main detection sensors may be one or more, and the number is not limited to two and may be another number.

  The first sub-detection sensor 38C and the second sub-detection sensor 38D detect the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B, and are optical such as a diffuse reflection sensor. Type sensor. The first sub-detection sensor 38C and the second sub-detection sensor 38D detect the presence of an object based on, for example, a change in the amount of reflected light that is received. The first sub-detection sensor 38C is arranged in the center of the upper part of the display unit 391B, and the second sub-detection sensor 38D is arranged in the center of the lower part of the display unit 391B, and the respective ranges in which the presence of an object can be detected are different.

  Here, FIG. 44 is a front view schematically showing the detection ranges of the first and second sub detection sensors 38C and 38D with respect to the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. Specifically, FIG. 44A shows a detection range of the first sub detection sensor 38C (a cross-hatched portion in the drawing), and FIG. 44B shows a detection range of the second sub detection sensor 38D ( FIG. 44C shows an overlapping range (cross hatching in the figure) of the detection range of the first sub detection sensor 38C and the detection range of the second sub detection sensor 38D. Part).

  As shown in FIG. 44(A), the first sub detection sensor 38C excludes the upper left corner and the upper right corner of the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B based on the change in the amount of reflected light received. Detect the presence of objects in the area.

  As shown in FIG. 44(B), the second sub detection sensor 38D excludes the lower left corner and the lower right corner of the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B based on the change in the amount of reflected light received. Detect the presence of objects in the area.

  As shown in FIG. 44C, the overlapping range between the detection range of the first sub detection sensor 38C (see FIG. 44A) and the detection range of the second sub detection sensor 38D (see FIG. 44B) is , The area excluding the four corners of the display portion 391B. That is, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B and the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D are set to have different detection ranges.

  By the way, each of the first sub detection sensor 38C and the second sub detection sensor 38D may detect an object other than the front side of the display unit 391B (left side or right side of the display unit 391B). For example, a game ball passing through the left side of the display unit 391B through the warp, a main movable accessory member 39A moving on the right side of the display unit 391B, and a player's action on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected. May be done. On the other hand, whether the touch operation is performed on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B within the overlapping range of the detection range of the first sub detection sensor 38C and the detection range of the second sub detection sensor 38D. By setting the detection range for determining whether or not, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection that a touch operation is performed by an object existing around the display unit 391B. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a touch operation is performed on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B within the overlapping range of the detection range of the first sub detection sensor 38C and the detection range of the second sub detection sensor 38D. The detection range is used to determine whether or not it has occurred. That is, the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 341 is performed when the presence of an object is detected by both the first sub detection sensor 38C and the second sub detection sensor 38D. Of course, when an object is detected by one of the first sub detection sensor 38C and the second sub detection sensor 38D, it may be determined that the object exists on the front side of the display unit 391B. Further, the number of sub-detection sensors may be one or more, and the number is not limited to two and may be another number.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes the two movable accessory members 39A and 39B, the two display portions 341 and 391B, and the detection sensor 38A that detects a touch operation on each of the display portions 341 and 391B. ~38D. That is, in this embodiment, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B and the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D having different detection ranges are provided. Therefore, in the present embodiment, while preventing erroneous detection due to the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A, the touch operation effect based on the touch operation on the front side of the sub movable accessory member 39B different from the symbol display portion 341 can be mainly moved. It becomes possible to make it execute on the display unit 391B of the accessory member 39A. Thereby, even when the main movable accessory member 39A is in operation, the touch operation can be accepted and the touch operation effect can be executed. In the present embodiment as described above, mainly the processes such as the touch operation detection process, the movable accessory member operation process, and the touch operation effect execution process are different from those in the first embodiment. The above-mentioned processing different from the first embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49.

[Touch operation detection process]
Here, FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation detection process (step S1703) executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation detection process of the present embodiment, a predetermined region (panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is based on the detection results of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B by the same procedure as in the first embodiment described above. The touch operation state for the specific area) is detected, and the processing for sequentially updating the past three times of the touch operation history for the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is executed (steps S2901 to S2908). As a result, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 51 executes the touch operation detection process, so that the symbol display unit is set at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. The presence/absence of a touch operation by the player on a predetermined area (specific area on the panel 25) on the front side of 341 is determined.

  In the touch operation detection process of the present embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the sub movable accessory member member 39B with respect to the front side of the display unit 391B is further detected based on the detection results of the sub detection sensors 38C and 38D. A process for detecting the touch operation state and sequentially updating the past three touch operation histories on the front side of the display unit 391B is executed (steps S2909 to S2916). As a result, in the gaming machine 10, the touch operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, so that the display unit 391B is at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence/absence of a touch operation by the player on the front side of is determined.

<Steps S2901 and S2902>
As shown in FIG. 45, in steps S2901 and S2902, the MPU 51 executes a process of shifting the touch operation history of the previous two and the previous touch operation history among the touch operation histories of the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. To do. Specifically, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second main touch operation detection flag to the first main touch operation detection flag (step S2901), and sets the third main touch operation detection flag to the second main touch. The operation detection flag is shifted (overwritten) (step S2902).

<Steps S2903 and S2904>
In step S2903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the presence of the touch operation object is detected by the first main detection sensor 38A, and when the presence of the object is detected by the first main detection sensor 38A (step S2903: Yes). ), the first main detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S2904), and the process proceeds to step S2905. On the other hand, when the presence of an object is not detected by the first main detection sensor 38A (step S2903: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2905 without setting the first main detection sensor detection flag to ON.

<Steps S2905 and S2906>
In step S2905, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the second main detection sensor 38B, and when the presence of the object is detected by the second main detection sensor 38B (step S2905: Yes), The second main detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S2906), and the process proceeds to step S2907. On the other hand, when the presence of an object is not detected by the second main detection sensor 38B (step S2905: NO), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2907 without setting the second main detection sensor detection flag to ON.

<Steps S2907 and S2908>
In step S2907, the MPU 51 sets the latest touch operation state to the third main touch operation detection flag based on the first main detection sensor detection flag and the second main detection sensor detection flag. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the third main touch operation detection flag to ON when both the first main detection sensor detection flag and the second main detection sensor detection flag are set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 determines that the object is present in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 when the presence of the object is detected by both the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B, and the third is determined. The main touch operation detection flag is set to ON. On the other hand, when at least one of the first main detection sensor detection flag and the second main detection sensor detection flag is set to OFF, the MPU 51 has an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. If not, the third main touch operation detection flag is set to off. Further, when the setting of the third main touch operation detection flag is completed, the MPU 51 sets the first main detection sensor detection flag and the second main detection sensor detection flag to OFF, and shifts the processing to step S2909.

<Steps S2909 and S2910>
In steps S2909 and S2910, the MPU 51 performs a process of shifting the touch operation history of the previous two or the previous touch operation history among the touch operation history of the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. Specifically, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second sub-touch operation detection flag to the first sub-touch operation detection flag (step S2909), and sets the third sub-touch operation detection flag to the second sub-touch operation detection flag. It is shifted (overwritten) (step S2910).

<Steps S2911 and S2912>
In step S2911, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the first sub-detection sensor 38C, and when the presence of the object is detected by the first sub-detection sensor 38C (step S2911: Yes), The first sub detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S2912), and the process proceeds to step S2913. On the other hand, when the presence of an object is not detected by the first sub detection sensor 38C (step S2911: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2913 without setting the first sub detection sensor detection flag to ON.

<Steps S2913 and S2914>
In step S2913, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the second sub detection sensor 38D, and when the presence of the object is detected by the second sub detection sensor 38D (step S2911: Yes), The second sub detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S2914), and the process proceeds to step S2915. On the other hand, when the presence of the object is not detected by the second sub detection sensor 38D (step S2913: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2915 without setting the second sub detection sensor detection flag to ON.

<Steps S2915 and S2916>
In step S2915, the MPU 51 sets the latest touch operation state to the third sub touch operation detection flag based on the first sub detection sensor detection flag and the second sub detection sensor detection flag. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the third sub touch operation detection flag to ON when both the first sub detection sensor detection flag and the second sub detection sensor detection flag are set to ON. That is, when the presence of the object is detected by both the first sub detection sensor 38C and the second sub detection sensor 38D, the MPU 51 detects the presence of the object in the predetermined area on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. Then, the third sub-touch operation detection flag is set to ON. On the other hand, when at least one of the first sub detection sensor detection flag and the second sub detection sensor detection flag is set to OFF, the MPU 51 has no object in the predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 391B. Therefore, the third sub-touch operation detection flag is set to OFF. Further, when the setting of the third sub-touch operation detection flag is completed, the MPU 51 sets the first sub-detection sensor detection flag and the second sub-detection sensor detection flag to OFF, and ends the touch operation detection process.

  In this way, in the touch operation detection process, the processes of steps S2901 to S2908 are executed, so that the touch operation state for the last three times at 1 msec intervals as the main touch operation history for the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is performed. Are stored in the RAM 512 as the first main touch operation detection flag to the third main touch operation detection flag. Specifically, the most recent touch operation state is stored as the third main touch operation detection flag, the previous touch operation state is stored as the second main touch operation detection flag, and two as the first main touch operation detection flag. The previous operating state is stored. Then, based on the main touch operation history of the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, which is composed of the first main touch operation detection flag to the third main touch operation detection flag, touch on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 The operation detection pattern is determined.

  Here, FIG. 46A is a diagram showing an example of a main touch operation data table showing the relationship between the main touch operation detection pattern and the main touch operation status.

  As shown in FIG. 46(A), when the main touch operation history is “ON”, “ON”, or “ON”, the MPU 51 continues the touch operation to the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Therefore, the first main touch operation pattern flag is set to “ON”, the second main touch operation pattern flag is set to “OFF”, and the third main touch operation pattern flag is set to “OFF”.

  When the main touch operation history is “OFF”, “ON”, or “ON”, the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is started, and the first main touch is performed. The operation pattern flag is set to “off”, the second main touch operation pattern flag is set to “on”, and the third main touch operation pattern flag is set to “off”.

  When the main touch operation history is “ON”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 has ended, and the first main touch. The operation pattern flag is set to “OFF”, the second main touch operation pattern flag is set to “OFF”, and the third main touch operation pattern flag is set to “ON”.

  If the main touch operation history is neither the continuation of the touch operation, the start of the touch operation, nor the end of the touch operation, the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation is not performed on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Then, the first main touch operation pattern flag is set to “OFF”, the second main touch operation pattern flag is set to “OFF”, and the third main touch operation pattern flag is set to “OFF”.

  In the touch operation detection process, further, the processes of steps S2909 to S2916 are executed, so that the last three touch operation states at 1 msec intervals as the sub touch operation history on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. The first sub-touch operation detection flag to the third sub-touch operation detection flag are stored in the RAM 512. Specifically, the latest touch operation state is stored as the third sub-touch operation detection flag, the previous touch operation state is stored as the second sub-touch operation detection flag, and the second previous operation is stored as the first sub-touch operation detection flag. The state is stored. Then, the touch operation detection pattern for the front side of the display unit 391B is based on the main touch operation history for the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B including the first sub-touch operation detection flag to the third sub-touch operation detection flag. Is determined.

  Here, FIG. 46B is a diagram showing an example of the sub-touch operation data table showing the relationship between the sub-touch operation detection pattern and the sub-touch operation status.

  As shown in FIG. 46(B), when the sub-touch operation history is “ON”, “ON”, or “ON”, the MPU 51 performs a touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. It is determined that it is continuing, and the first sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "ON", the second sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "OFF", and the third sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "OFF".

  Further, the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B has started when the sub touch operation history is “OFF”, “ON”, or “ON”, The sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "off", the second sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "on", and the third sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to "off".

  Further, when the sub touch operation history is “ON”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B has ended, and The sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to “off”, the second sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to “off”, and the third sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to “on”.

  When the sub-touch operation history is neither the continuation of the touch operation, the start of the touch operation, nor the end of the touch operation, the MPU 51 does not perform the touch operation on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. Then, the first sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to “OFF”, the second sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to “OFF”, and the third sub-touch operation pattern flag is set to “OFF”.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
Here, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation processing executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

  In the movable accessory member operating process of the present embodiment, the process of operating the main movable accessory member 39A is executed in the same procedure as the process of operating the movable accessory member 39 of the first embodiment described above ( Steps S3001 to S3007). In the movable accessory member operation process of the present embodiment, differently from the above-described first embodiment, a process of operating the sub movable accessory member 39B is executed (steps S3008 to S3011).

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 47, in step S3001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3001). That is, in the MPU 51, the counter value of the variable display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, the operation timings G2, G4, G6 of the movable accessory member 39 (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the start time of is reached. Here, when it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3001: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3002, and when it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3001: No). ), and the procedural steps proceed to step S3004.

<Steps S3002 and S3003>
When it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the operation of the motor driver 39c that drives the first motor 39a1 that applies the driving force to the main movable accessory member 39A. A signal is output (step S3002). Thus, the motor driver 39c controls the first motor 39a1 to move the main movable accessory member 39A from the standby position to the operating position. Then, the MPU 51 sets the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag to ON (step S3003), and ends the movable accessory member member operation processing.

<Step S3004>
When it is not the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39 (step S3001: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3004). That is, in the MPU 51, the counter value of the variable display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, the operation timings G2, G4, G6 of the movable accessory member 39 (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the end point of is reached. Here, if it is the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3004: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3005, and if it is not the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3004: No). The process moves to step S3006.

<Step S3006>
When it is the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3004: Yes), the MPU 51 sends a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the first motor 39a1 that applies the driving force to the main movable accessory member 39A. The output is performed (step S3005), and the movable accessory member operation process ends. As a result, the motor driver 39c controls the first motor 39a1 to move the main movable accessory member 39A from the operating position to the standby position.

<Steps S3006 and S3007>
When it is not the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3004: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main movable accessory member 39A has returned to the standby position based on the detection signal from the return detector 39b. Yes (step S3006). Here, when the main movable accessory member member 39A is returned to the standby position (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag to off (step S3007), and the movable accessory member member is activated. The process ends. When the main movable accessory member 39A has not returned to the standby position (step S3006: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3008.

<Step S3008>
When it is not the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S3006: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the operation start timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3008). That is, in the MPU 51, the counter value of the variable display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, the operation timings G1, G3, G5 of the movable accessory member 39 (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the start time of is reached. Here, when it is the operation start timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3008: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3009, and when it is not the operation start timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3008: No), the process proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3009>
When it is the operation start timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3009: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the operation to the motor driver 39c that drives the second motor 39a2 that applies the driving force to the sub movable accessory member 39B. A signal is output (step S3009), and the movable accessory member operating process is ended. As a result, the motor driver 39c controls the second motor 39a2 to move the sub movable accessory member 39B from the standby position to the operating position.

<Step S3010>
When it is not the operation start timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3008: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the return timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3010). That is, in the MPU 51, the counter value of the variable display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, the operation timings G1, G3, G5 of the movable accessory member 39 (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the end point of is reached. Here, when it is the return timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3010: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3011, and when it is not the return timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3010: No). , The movable accessory member operation processing is ended.

<Step S3011>
When it is the return timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3010: Yes), the MPU 51 sends a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the second motor 39a2 that applies the driving force to the sub movable accessory member 39B. The output is performed (step S3011), and the movable accessory member operation process ends. As a result, the motor driver 39c controls the second motor 39a2 to move the sub movable accessory member 39B from the operating position to the standby position.

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a touch operation effect execution process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, when a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 in a predetermined touch operation reception period in the same procedure as that of the first embodiment described above. A process for executing the touch operation effect or a process for limiting the execution of the touch operation effect is performed (steps S3101 to S3106). However, in the present embodiment, in the second touch operation reception period R2 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4, when a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, the symbol display unit 341 The touch operation effect is executed or limited, but the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341 is not executed or limited in the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3.

  In the touch operation effect execution processing of the present embodiment, further, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B is displayed during the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3. When the touch operation is performed on the front side, the touch operation effect is executed (steps S3107 to S3111). In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution of the touch operation effect is not limited even when the main movable accessory member 39A or the sub movable accessory member 39B is in operation.

<Step S3100>
As shown in FIG. 48, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3100). This effect execution command is a command for executing a touch operation effect on the symbol display section 341 or the display section 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, and is executed by the display control device 6 in step S3104, S3106, S3109, or S3111 described later. Sent. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is determined by, for example, the transmission completion flag being turned on when the touch effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S3104, S3106, S3109, or S3111 described later. The determination can be made by setting it and confirming whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON. By determining whether or not the effect execution flag has been transmitted in step S3100, it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect from being repeatedly started. However, when it is determined that the main touch operation in the main touch operation state is started after the end of the touch operation effect (when it is determined that an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341), the touch operation is performed. The touch operation effect may be executed again on the condition that it is during the reception period.

  Here, if the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3100: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and if the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3100: No), the process is performed. The process moves to S3101.

<Step S3101>
When the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3100: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main detection sensors 38A and 38B detect the main touch operation based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether or not an object is present in a predetermined area (specific area of panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (step S3101). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the state (main touch operation state) of the touch operation (main touch operation) on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 corresponds to the main touch operation start or the main touch operation continuation. . Specifically, the MPU 51 performs the main touch operation when the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process is “OFF”, “ON”, and “OFF”. When it is determined that the state corresponds to the start of the main touch operation, and the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags is “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, the main touch operation state is the main touch operation continuation. It is determined to correspond to (see FIG. 46(A)). The detection of the main touch operation by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B in step S3101 does not mean whether or not the main touch operation is actually performed by the player, but the presence of an object in both the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. It means to be detected. Therefore, even when the main movable accessory member 39A is operated, it is determined that the main touch operation has been performed on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341, and the detection of the object by the main movable accessory member 39A is the main touch operation. May be falsely detected.

  Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3102, and the main touch operation is performed by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. When it is not determined that it is detected (step S3101: No), the process proceeds to step S3107.

<Step S3102>
In step S3102, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main movable accessory member operating flag which is set to ON in step S3003 in the movable accessory member operation process of FIG. 47 is set to ON. Here, when the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to OFF (step S3102: No), the MPU 51 performs the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27). On the condition that there is, a touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process of step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23 is displayed on the display control device 6. It is transmitted (step S3103 to step S3106 described later).

  On the other hand, when the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON (step S3102: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process. That is, in the present embodiment, the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B, so that the main touch operation state is the main touch operation. When it is determined to correspond to the start, even if the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is set, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. By ending the touch operation effect execution process, the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored.

  Here, the flag indicating that the main movable accessory member operating flag has reached the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A and the operation start signal for operating the main movable accessory member 39A is output to the motor driver 39c. Since it is set to ON (steps S3001 to S3003 in FIG. 47), the main movable accessory member 39A is not operating and is in the standby position when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. On the other hand, the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF when the return detection unit 39b detects the return to the standby position (steps S3006 and S3007 in FIG. 47). Therefore, the main movable accessory member operating flag is set. When the middle flag is set to OFF, the main movable accessory member 39A is not operating and is in the standby position. That is, from the stage at which it is decided to operate the main movable accessory member 39A (the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position immediately before the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is started), The main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON until the return of the object member 39A is confirmed and the main movable accessory member member 39A is in the standby position, and the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection The detection result of the sensor 38B is ignored. Therefore, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. Even if detected, the detection result by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B regardless of whether it is the touch operation by the player or the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A. Is ignored, the touch operation effect is not executed even in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4.

<Steps S3103 and S3104>
In step S3103, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 can be determined by, for example, referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and also for determining whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2. You may judge by operating a counter.

  Here, when the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 (step S3103: Yes), the second touch operation effect for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the second touch operation acceptance period R2. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3104), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 is executed on the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 is not in the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3103: No), the process proceeds to step S3105.

<Steps S3105 and S3106>
In step S3105, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 can be determined by, for example, referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and is also used to determine whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4. You may judge by operating a counter.

  Here, when the MPU 51 is in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3105: Yes), the fourth touch operation production for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation production in the fourth touch operation reception period R4. An execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3106), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 is executed on the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, when it is not the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3105: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process without executing the touch operation effect.

<Step S3107>
When it is not determined that the touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3101: No), the MPU 51 performs the sub-touch operation based on the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether or not it is detected (whether or not an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B) (step S3107). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the state of the touch operation (subtouch operation) on the predetermined area on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B (subtouch operation state) corresponds to the start of the subtouch operation or the continuation of the subtouch operation. to decide. Specifically, the MPU 51 performs sub-touch when the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21 is “OFF”, “ON”, and “OFF”. It is determined that the operation state corresponds to start of sub-touch operation, and when the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags is “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, the sub-touch operation state corresponds to continuation of sub-touch operation. It is determined (see FIG. 46(B)).

  Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3107: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3108, and the sub-touch operation is not detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D. When it is determined (step S3107: No), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Steps S3108 and S3109>
When it is determined that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3107: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27) (step S3108). ). Whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 can be determined by, for example, referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1. You may judge by operating a counter.

  Here, in the case of the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B to execute the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1. The first touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3109), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 is executed on the display unit 391B. In the first touch operation reception period R1, the touch operation reception effect is not executed, and the touch operation effect A is executed when the touch operation is started (see FIG. 49(A)). On the other hand, when the MPU 51 is not in the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3108: No), the process proceeds to step S3110.

<Steps S3110 and S3111>
In step S3110, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3 can be determined by, for example, referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3. You may judge by operating a counter.

  Here, in the case of the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the display unit 391B of the sub movable auditors member 39B to execute the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3. The third touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3111), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 is executed on the display unit 391B. In the third touch operation reception period R3, the touch operation reception effect is executed, and the touch operation effect B is executed when the touch operation is started (see FIG. 49(B)). On the other hand, when it is not the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process.

  As described above, when detecting the presence of an object in the overlapping range (see FIG. 43(C)) of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B, the main movable accessory When the member 39A is operated, the presence of an object is detected by both the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. That is, when the overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B is set as the detection range of the presence of the object, the main touch operation state is changed by the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A. Since it is determined to correspond to the start of the main touch operation, when the main movable accessory member 39A is activated during the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the touch operation effect is caused by erroneous detection. Will be executed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the main movable accessory member member 39A is determined to be activated while the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON (main It is confirmed that the main movable accessory member 39A has returned from the stage where the main movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member 39A is started, and the main movable accessory member 39A is set to the standby position. Until a certain stage, the detection of the object by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B is ignored, and the execution of the touch operation effect is limited. Therefore, even if the main movable accessory member member 39A starts to operate after the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON, it is possible to restrict the execution of the touch operation effect, and of course the main movable accessory member member 39A. It is also possible to limit the execution of the touch operation effect until the is returned to the standby position. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is executed because the operation of the main movable accessory member is erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is performed not only on the symbol display portion 341 but also on the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. Therefore, since the touch operation effects can be diversified, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Then, in the present embodiment, the touch operation effect executed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B is executed regardless of whether or not the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. As a result, a touch operation performed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, which is performed at a position visible by the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A even when the main movable accessory member 39A is in the operating position. It is possible to prevent the performance from being unnecessarily limited.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the case where the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 391B by the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B has been described, but as shown in FIG. By the touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B in the first or third touch operation reception periods R1 and R3, the touch operation effect is executed on the symbol display unit 341 on condition that the main movable accessory member 39A is not operating. You may do it. On the contrary, as shown in FIG. 51, the main movable accessory member 39A is not operated by the touch operation on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 in the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4. Under the condition, the touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 391B. 50 and 51 exemplify the case where the touch operation reception effect is executed during the touch operation reception period, but the touch operation is performed even when the touch operation reception effect is not executed during the touch operation reception period. The touch operation effect may be executed on a display unit different from the display unit on which the touch operation is performed. Furthermore, on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the touch operation effect may be executed on a display unit different from the display unit on which the touch operation is performed, and the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot. On the condition that the touch operation is performed, the touch operation effect may be performed on a display unit different from the display unit.

  In this way, when the touch operation effect is performed on the display unit different from the display unit on which the touch operation is performed, the touch operation effect is performed on the display unit that is not expected by the player, so that what type ( It is possible to focus not only on whether the touch operation effect of (expectation level) is executed, but also on which display unit the touch operation effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from being diminished, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, if the touch operation effect is executed on a display unit different from the display unit on which the touch operation is performed on condition that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, the interest of the game is effectively improved. If the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot, the interest of the game can be improved more effectively.

  In addition, a touch operation on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 and a touch operation on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B are simultaneously accepted, and when any of the touch operations is performed, the symbol display unit 341. It is also conceivable to execute the touch operation effect on at least one of the display portions 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B.

  Further, in the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B during the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A are ignored. By limiting the execution of the touch operation effect, it is possible to deal with the erroneous detection of the touch operation by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B, but it is possible to move the touch operation as in the second embodiment. While the accessory member operating flag is set to ON, erroneous detection is performed by not executing the process of determining whether or not the presence of an object is detected by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. You may respond.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the sub movable accessory member 39B includes the display portion 391B. It may be configured to include a sub-display.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the above-described fourth embodiment, when the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON (a stage in which it is determined to operate the main movable accessory member member 39A (operation of the main movable accessory member member 39A). (Just before the start) until the return of the main movable accessory member 39A is confirmed), the detection result of the object by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B is ignored, and the touch operation effect is produced. The case where execution of is restricted is explained.

  On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the touch effect on the display portion of the sub movable accessory member when the main movable accessory member is in operation during the touch operation reception period for executing the touch operation on the symbol display portion. This is different from the first embodiment in that a specific effect is executed.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described fourth embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 52, in the present embodiment, when the main movable accessory member 39A is operated during the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, or during operation of the main movable accessory member 39A. When the second touch operation reception period R2 is started, the specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed not on the symbol display section 341 but on the display section 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B.

  In the second touch operation acceptance period R2, the touch operation acceptance effect that clearly indicates that it is the touch operation acceptance period is not executed in the symbol display unit 341, while in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4, the touch operation acceptance effect is in the symbol display unit 341. Executed. Further, in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 or the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4, if the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is not set to ON, the touch operation effect is executed in the symbol display unit 341.

  It should be noted that the specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (a jackpot expectation degree) or an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result, but in the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation degree is set. It is executed as the effect shown (see FIG. 40).

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIG. 53 and FIG. 54 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution processing executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, the front surface of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B in the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3, as in the above-described fourth embodiment. When the touch operation is performed on the side, the touch operation effect is executed (S3108 to S3111 in FIG. 54).

  In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, further, unlike the above-described fourth embodiment, in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the main movable auditors member operating flag is turned on. When set to, a specific effect different from the touch effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B (steps S3202 to S3205 and steps S3208 to S3211 in FIG. 53). The specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (a jackpot expectation degree) or an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result, but in the present embodiment, an effect indicating the jackpot expectation degree (See FIG. 40). The display content on the display unit 391B is controlled by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 based on a variable display command transmitted from the MPU 51.

<Step S3200>
As shown in FIG. 53, in step S3200, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6. This effect execution command is a command for executing a touch operation effect on the symbol display section 341, or a touch operation effect or a specific effect on the display section 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, and steps S3205, S3207, which will be described later. It is transmitted to the display control device 6 in S3211 or S3213. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is determined by, for example, the transmission completion flag being set to ON when the effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S3205, S3207, S3211, or S3213 described below. Then, the determination can be made by confirming whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON.

  Here, when the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3200: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and when the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3200: No), the process is performed. The process moves to S3201.

<Step S3201>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3200: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D based on the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags (sub-movable). It is determined whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the display portion 391B of the accessory member 39B (step S3201). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the state (sub-touch operation state) of the touch operation (sub-touch operation) on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B corresponds to the sub-touch operation start or the sub-touch operation continuation. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines that the sub-touch operation state is when the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags determined in the sub-touch operation detection pattern determination process is “OFF”, “ON”, “OFF”. It is determined that the sub-touch operation starts, and when the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags is “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, the sub-touch operation state is determined to correspond to the sub-touch operation continuation ( See FIG. 46(B).

  Here, when it is determined that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3108 in FIG. 54. As shown in FIG. 54, the process after it is determined that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D is the same as that in the above-described fourth embodiment, and the first touch-operation receiving period R1 or the third A command for executing a touch operation when a sub-touch operation is performed during the touch operation reception period R3 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (steps S3108 to S3111).

  On the other hand, when the MPU 51 does not determine that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3201: No), the process proceeds to step S3202 of FIG.

<Step S3202>
When it is not determined that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27) (step S3202). . Whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 can be determined, for example, by referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and also for determining whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, when the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3203, and when it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3202: No), the process is stepped. The procedure moves to S3208.

<Step S3203>
In the case of the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3202: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main movable auditors member operating flag indicating that the main movable auditors member 39A is operating is set to ON. It is determined (step S3203). Here, when the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3204, and the main movable accessory member member-in-operation flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3203: No), the process moves to step S3206.

<Steps S3204 and S3205>
When the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a specific effect (an effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member member 39B. Is determined (step S3204). Then, the MPU 51 performs the specific effect determined in step S3204 instead of causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process of step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. A specific effect execution command to be executed by the display unit 391B is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3205), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the specific effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
When the flag in operation of the main movable accessory member is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 causes the main detection sensors 38A and 38B to perform a main touch based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether or not an operation is detected (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) (step S3206). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the state (main touch operation state) of the touch operation (main touch operation) on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 corresponds to the main touch operation start or the main touch operation continuation. . Specifically, the MPU 51 performs the main touch operation when the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process is “OFF”, “ON”, and “OFF”. When it is determined that the state corresponds to the start of the main touch operation, and the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags is “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, the main touch operation state is the main touch operation continuation. It is determined to correspond to (see FIG. 46(A)).

  Here, when the touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3206: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2. A two-touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3207), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 is executed on the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3206: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process without executing the touch operation effect.

<Step S3208>
In step S3208, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 can be determined by, for example, referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and is also used to determine whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4. You may judge by operating a counter. If the MPU 51 is in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3208: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3209, and if it is not the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3208: No), the touch operation is performed. The production execution process ends.

<Step S3209>
When it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3208: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag indicating that the main movable accessory member member 39A is operating is set to ON. It is determined (step S3209). Here, when the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON (step S3209: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3210, and the main movable accessory member member-in-operation flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3209: NO), the process proceeds to step S3212.

<Steps S3210 and S3211>
When the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON (step S3209: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the display section 391B of the sub movable accessory member member 39B to perform a specific effect (an effect different from the touch operation effect). Is determined (step S3210). Then, the MPU 51 performs the specific effect determined in step S3210 instead of causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process of step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. A specific effect execution command to be executed by the display unit 391B is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3211), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the specific effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B.

<Steps S3212 and S3213>
When the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to OFF (step S3209: No), the MPU 51 performs main operation based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags, as in step S3206. It is determined whether or not the main touch operation is detected by the detection sensors 38A and 38B (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display section 341) (step S3212). Here, when it is determined that the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3212: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 on the symbol display unit 341. A fourth touch operation effect execution command for setting is transmitted and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3213), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 is executed on the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3212: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process without executing the touch operation effect.

  As described above, when detecting the presence of an object in the overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B, the main movable accessory member 39A is activated. The presence of an object is detected by both the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. That is, when the overlapping range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B is set as the detection range of the presence of the object, the touch operation is performed by the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A. Therefore, if the main movable accessory member 39A operates during the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the touch operation effect is executed due to the false detection. Occurs.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the case of the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the symbol display unit 341, the main movable combination On the condition that the object member operating flag is set to ON, that is, at the stage when it is decided to operate the main movable accessory member 39A (main movable just before the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is started. From the stage where the accessory member 39 is in the standby position) to the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is confirmed to be returned and the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position, the symbol display portion Instead of executing the touch operation effect in 341, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed in the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. Therefore, in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the symbol display unit 341, the touch operation effect is executed even if the main movable accessory member 39A is operated. Can be restricted. In addition to that, instead of the touch operation effect on the symbol display portion 341, the specific effect is executed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B whose visibility is not obstructed when the main movable accessory member 39A is activated. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game as compared with the case where the execution of the touch operation effect is simply limited.

  In addition, on condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4. Instead of executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable auditors member 39B, and the lottery result changes with certainty. On the condition that the jackpot is a big hit, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. In this way, when a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display section 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B instead of executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display section 341, the player does not expect. By paying attention to not only what type (expectation level) of touch operation performance is executed by executing the specific effect on the display unit, but also on which display unit the effect is executed. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from being diminished, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, on the condition that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, instead of the touch operation effect being executed at the symbol display portion 341, the specific effect is executed at the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. By doing so, the interest of the game can be effectively improved, and the interest of the game can be improved more effectively by providing that the lottery result is the probability variation jackpot.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is provided with the movable accessory member 39 that is moved between the standby position and the operating position, and by operating the movable accessory member 39, a chance-up effect and a big hit are confirmed. The case where the performance is executed has been described. In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, while the movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON (at the stage when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member member 39 (when the movable accessory member member 39 is operated). (Immediately before the start) until the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed), the case where the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is limited has been described. .

  On the other hand, the present embodiment is common to the above-described first embodiment in that a movable accessory member is provided, but is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the movable accessory member has a display portion. Further, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member is in operation during the period for accepting the touch operation for executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display portion, the display effect of the movable accessory member is different from the touch effect. This is different from the first embodiment in that a specific effect is executed.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

  Here, FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the movable accessory member operation effect executed by the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 55, the movable accessory member 39C includes a display unit 392C including a liquid crystal display, a dot matrix display, or the like. That is, the movable accessory member 39C also has a function as a sub-display. In C on the display unit 392, for example, the image effect is executed when the movable accessory member 39C is in the operating position. In the present embodiment, when the execution period of the movable accessory member effect and the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (see FIG. 7) overlap, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect. To be done. The specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (a jackpot expectation degree) or an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result, but in the present embodiment, an effect indicating the jackpot expectation degree (See FIG. 40). The display content on the display unit 392C is controlled by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 based on a variable display command transmitted from the MPU 51.

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution processing executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, as in the above-described first embodiment, in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (specification of the panel 25). A touch operation effect can be executed when a touch operation is performed on the area.

  In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. When it is present, a specific effect different from the touch effect is executed on the display portion 392C of the movable accessory member 39C.

<Step S3300>
As shown in FIG. 56, in step S3300, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6. This effect execution command is a command for executing a touch operation effect on the symbol display section 341 or a specific effect on the display section 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, and will be described later in steps S3305, S3306, and S3210. It is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S3311, S3315, step S3316, step S3305, or S3320. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is set to ON, for example, when the effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S3305, S3210, S3320 or S3321 described later. Then, the determination can be made by confirming whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON.

  Here, when the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3300: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and when the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3300: No), the process is performed. The processing moves to S3301.

<Step S3301>
When the production execution command has not been transmitted (step S3300: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags (pattern). It is determined whether or not an object is present in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the display unit 341 (step S3301). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the state of the touch operation (touch operation state) on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 corresponds to the start of the touch operation or the continuation of the touch operation. Specifically, the MPU 51 performs the touch operation when the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags determined in the touch operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21 is “OFF”, “ON”, and “OFF”. When the state corresponds to the touch operation start and the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags is “on”, “off”, and “off”, it is determined that the touch operation state corresponds to the touch operation continuation (FIG. 22(B)). The touch operation detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d in step S3301 includes a case where the player performs a touch operation and a case where the movable accessory member 39C operates. That is, the MPU 51 may erroneously detect that the touch operation state is touch operation start or touch operation continuation when the movable accessory member 39C is activated. Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3302, and the touch operation is performed by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. When it is not determined that it is detected (step S3301: No), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S3302>
When it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27) (step S3301). S3302). Whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 can be determined by, for example, referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if the MPU 51 is in the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3302: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3303, and if it is not the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3302: No), the process is stepped. The process moves to S3307.

<Step S3303>
When it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member 39C is operating is set to ON. It is determined (step S3303). Here, when the movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON (step S3303: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3304, and the movable accessory member member-in-operation flag is set to OFF. In that case (step S3303: No), the process proceeds to step S3306.

<Steps S3304 and S3305>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3303: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a specific effect (an effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. Yes (step S3304). Then, the MPU 51 replaces the design display unit 341 with the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23) and causes the specific effect determined in step S3304. A specific effect execution command for causing the display unit 392C to execute is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3305), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, the specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect for the first touch operation acceptance period R1 on the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S3306>
When the object does not exist in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (step S3303: No), the MPU 51 makes the symbol display unit 341 execute the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1. A touch operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3306), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 is executed on the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S3307>
When it is not the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3302: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27) (step S3307). Whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 can be determined by, for example, referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and also for determining whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3307: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3308, and if it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3307: No), the process is performed. 57, the flow proceeds to step S3312.

<Step S3308>
When it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member 39C is operating is set to ON. It is determined (step S3308). Here, when the movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3309, and the movable accessory member member-in-operation flag is set to OFF. In that case (step S3308: No), the process proceeds to step S3311.

<Steps S3309 and S3310>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3308: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a specific effect (an effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. Yes (step S3309). Then, the MPU 51 replaces the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23) on the symbol display unit 341, and the specific effect determined in step S3309. A specific effect execution command for causing the display unit 392C to execute is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3310), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, the specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect for the second reception period R2 on the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S3311>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3308: No), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2. The operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3311), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 is executed on the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S3312>
As shown in FIG. 57, when it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3307: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27) (step S3312). . Whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3 can be determined by, for example, referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and also for determining whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if the MPU 51 is in the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3312: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3313, and if it is not the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3312: No), the process is stepped. It moves to S3317.

<Step S3313>
When it is the third touch operation acceptance period R3 (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member 39C is operating is set to ON. It is determined (step S3313). Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3313: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3314, and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. In that case (step S3313: No), the process proceeds to step S3316.

<Steps S3314 and S3315>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3313: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a specific effect (an effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. Yes (step S3314). Then, the MPU 51 replaces the touch display effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23) on the symbol display unit 341, and the specific effect determined in step S3314. A specific effect execution command for causing the display unit 392C to execute is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3315), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, the specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect for the third touch operation acceptance period R3 on the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S3316>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3313: No), the MPU 51 performs the third touch for causing the symbol display unit 341 to perform the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3. The operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3316), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 is executed on the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S3317>
When it is not the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3312: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27) (step S3317). Whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 can be determined by, for example, referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and is also used to determine whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if the MPU 51 is in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3317: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3318, and if it is not the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3317: No), the first to first Since it can be determined that it is not one of the fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S3318>
When it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3317: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member 39C is operating is set to ON. It is determined (step S3318). Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3318: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3319 and sets the movable accessory member operating flag to OFF. In that case (step S3318: No), the process proceeds to step S3321.

<Steps S3319 and S3320>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3318: Yes), the MPU 51 determines a specific effect (an effect different from the touch operation effect) to be executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. Yes (step S3319). Then, the MPU 51 replaces the design display unit 341 with the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process in FIG. 23), and the specific effect determined in step S3319. A specific effect execution command for causing the display unit 392C to execute is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3320), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, the specific effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect for the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 on the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S3321>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3318: No), the MPU 51 performs the fourth touch for causing the symbol display unit 341 to perform the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4. The operation effect execution command is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3321), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is executed on the symbol display unit 341.

  By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, if the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON when it is determined that an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, a plurality of detections are made. The touch operation effect is not executed by ignoring the detection results of the sensors 38a to 38d. However, there is a concern that the interest in the game may be diminished by the fact that the touch operation effect that should be originally executed is not executed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the movable accessory member operating flag is turned on in the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the symbol display unit 341. When set, instead of executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. Therefore, in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the symbol display portion 341, the touch operation effect is executed as long as the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. You can limit what is done. In addition to that, instead of the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, the specific effect is executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C that is not visually impaired when the movable accessory member 39C is activated. Therefore, not only what type (expectation level) of touch operation performance is executed by the player performing the specific effect on the display unit that is not expected by the player, but also on which display unit the effect is executed. You can also focus on that. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from being diminished, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the symbol display portion Instead of executing the touch operation effect in 341, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed in the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, and the lottery result is a sure-change jackpot. Depending on the condition, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. Thus, on condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, instead of the touch operation effect being performed in the symbol display portion 341, the specific effect is performed in the display portion 392C of the movable accessory member 39C. By doing so, the interest of the game can be effectively improved, and the interest of the game can be improved more effectively by providing that the lottery result is the probability variation big hit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, instead of performing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341. Although the specific effect is executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C, the same effect as the touch operation effect may be executed on the display unit 392C. That is, the touch operation effect to be executed on the symbol display unit 341 may be executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific effect is executed when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in all the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, but the specific effect is not necessarily required for all the touch operation reception. It is not necessary to execute in a period, and the specific effect may be executed in at least one operation reception period.

[Seventh Embodiment]
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 including the main movable accessory member 39A and the sub movable accessory member 39B having the display portion 391B has been described. Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the touch operation effect is executed not only on the symbol display portion 341 but also on the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, while the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON (a stage in which it is determined to operate the main movable accessory member member 39A (main movable accessory member member 39A). From the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is at the standby position immediately before the start of the operation) to the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is confirmed to be returned and the main movable accessory member 39A is at the standby position. ), the case where the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored and execution of the touch operation effect is limited has been described.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 including the movable accessory member 39C having the display portion 392C has been described. Further, in the above-described sixth embodiment, the movable accessory member operating flag is set in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 for executing the touch operation effect for the touch operation in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. From when the movable accessory member 39C is determined to be activated (immediately before the operation of the movable accessory member 39C is started) until the return of the movable accessory member 39C is confirmed. In the meantime, the case where a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 392C of the movable accessory member 39C has been described.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is common to the above-described fourth embodiment in that it includes a main movable accessory member and a sub-movable accessory member having a display portion, while the sixth embodiment described above. Unlike the above, the main movable accessory member is different from the above-described fourth embodiment in that the main movable accessory member is provided with a display portion, but is common to the above-described sixth embodiment.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the touch operation acceptance period for executing the touch operation effect for the touch operation on the front side of the display portion of the sub movable accessory member. In the case where the touch operation is performed on the front side of the display part of the sub movable accessory member, if a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display part of the main movable accessory member, It is different from the above-described fourth and sixth embodiments.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described fourth embodiment and sixth embodiment.

  Here, FIGS. 58 and 59 are diagrams showing an example of the specific effect executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. Note that FIG. 58 is an example in which the specific effect is executed when the touch operation reception effect that clearly indicates the touch operation reception period is not executed (first touch operation reception period R1), and FIG. 59 is the touch operation reception effect. This is an example in which the specific effect is executed when is executed (third touch operation reception period R3).

  As shown in FIG. 58, in the first touch operation reception period R1, the touch operation reception effect clearly indicating that it is the touch operation reception period is not executed, but in the first touch operation reception period R1, the sub movable accessory member 39B is operated. When the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON when a touch operation is performed on the front side of the display portion 391B, the main movable accessory member member is not the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member member 39B. On the display unit 392A of 39A, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 59, in the third touch operation reception period R3, a touch operation reception effect that clearly indicates that it is the touch operation reception period is executed, and during the third touch operation reception period R3, the display of the sub movable accessory member 39B is performed. Even if the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON when a touch operation is performed on the front side of the portion 391B, the main movable accessory member is not the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member member 39B. On the display portion 392A of the member 39A, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed.

  In addition, during the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3, when a touch operation is performed on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, the main movable accessory member operating flag is set. When it is not set to ON, the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B as in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 49). Further, the specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (a jackpot expectation degree) or an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result, but in the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation degree is set. It is executed as the effect shown (see FIG. 40).

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIG. 60 and FIG. 61 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution processing executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, during the second touch operation reception period R2 and the fourth touch operation reception period R4, the main movable auditors member operating flag is turned on as in the fourth embodiment described above. From the time when it is set (when the main movable accessory member 39A is determined to be activated (when the main movable accessory member 39A is in the standby position immediately before the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is started) , Until the main movable accessory member 39A is confirmed to be in a standby position after the return of the main movable accessory member 39A), the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored. , The execution of the touch operation effect is restricted (steps S3101 to S3106 in FIG. 60).

  In addition, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, in the first touch operation reception period R1 and the third touch operation reception period R3, when the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to OFF, the sub movable combination. When an object exists on the front side of the display portion 391B of the object member 39B, instead of the touch operation effect on the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member member 39B, the touch operation effect on the display portion 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. 61 is executed (steps S3401 to S3105 and steps S3407 to S3110 in FIG. 61).

<Steps S3101-S3106>
As shown in FIG. 60, when the object is present in the predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (Yes at Step S3101:), the main movable accessory member operating flag is turned on. If it is set to (step S3102: Yes), the touch operation effect execution process is ended without executing the touch operation effect. On the other hand, if the main movable accessory member in-operation flag is set to OFF (step S3102: No), the condition is that it is the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3103 or Yes in S3105), the touch operation effect execution command for executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3104 or S3106).

<Step S3400>
As shown in FIG. 61, when the MPU 51 does not determine that the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (the object does not exist in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 (specific area of the panel 25)). In the case) (step S3401: No), it is determined whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3400). This effect execution command is a command for executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display section 341 or the sub movable accessory member and executing the specific effect on the display section 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A, and step S3406 described later. Alternatively, it is transmitted to the display control device 6 in S3411. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 has been transmitted, for example, when the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S3104, S3106, step S3405, S3406, S3410, or S3411 described later. The flag can be set to ON, and it can be determined by checking whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON.

  Here, when the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S3400: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and when the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3400: No), the process is performed. The process moves to S3401.

<Step S3401>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3400: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D based on the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags (sub-movable). It is determined whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the display portion 391B of the accessory member 39B) (step S3401). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the state (sub-touch operation state) of the touch operation (sub-touch operation) on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B corresponds to the sub-touch operation start or the sub-touch operation continuation. Specifically, when the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags is “off”, “on”, and “off”, the MPU 51 corresponds to the sub-touch operation start, and the first to the first When the combination of the 3 sub-touch operation pattern flags is "ON", "OFF", and "OFF", it is determined that the sub-touch operation state corresponds to the sub-touch operation continuation (see FIG. 46(B)).

  Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3401: Yes), the process moves to step S3402, and the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D. If not determined (step S3401: NO), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S3402>
In step S3402, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the first touch operation reception period R1 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1 can be determined by, for example, referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the first touch operation reception period R1. You may judge by operating a counter. If the MPU 51 is in the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3403, and if it is not the first touch operation reception period R1 (step S3402: No), the process is stepped. The procedure moves to S3407.

<Step S3403>
In the case of the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag indicating that the main movable accessory member member 39A is operating is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3403). Here, when the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON (step S3403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3404, and the main movable accessory member member-in-operation flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3403: NO), the process proceeds to step S3406.

<Steps S3404 and S3405>
When the flag in operation of the main movable accessory member is set to ON (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A to execute a specific effect (an effect different from the touch operation effect). Is determined (step S3404). Then, the MPU 51 replaces the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23) on the display unit 391B of the sub movable auditors member 39B, and instead executes the step S3404. A specific effect execution command for causing the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A to execute the specific effect determined in step S3605 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3605), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, instead of executing the touch operation effect for the first touch operation acceptance period R1 on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, the specific effect is executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. It

<Step S3406>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF (step S3403: No), the MPU 51 displays the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. A first touch operation effect execution command to be executed is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3406), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the touch operation effect in the first touch operation reception period R1 is executed on the display unit 391B.

<Step S3407>
In step S3407, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the third touch operation reception period R3 (see FIG. 27). Whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3 can be determined by, for example, referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and for determining whether or not it is the third touch operation reception period R3. You may judge by operating a counter. Here, if the MPU 51 is in the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3407: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3408. If it is not the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3407: No), the touch operation is performed. The production execution process ends.

<Step S3408>
In the case of the third touch operation reception period R3 (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main movable accessory member member operating flag indicating that the main movable accessory member member 39A is operating is set to ON. It is determined (step S3408). Here, when the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON (step S3408: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3409, and the main movable accessory member member-in-operation flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3408: NO), the process proceeds to step S3411.

<Steps S3409 and S3410>
When the flag in operation of the main movable accessory member is set to ON (step S3408: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the display section 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A to perform a specific effect (an effect different from the touch operation effect). Is determined (step S3409). Then, the MPU 51 replaces the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination process (step S2205 in the command determination process of FIG. 23) on the display unit 391B of the sub movable auditors member 39B, and instead executes the step S3409. A specific effect execution command for causing the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A to execute the specific effect determined in step S3410 is transmitted to the display control device 6, and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, instead of executing the touch operation effect for the third touch operation acceptance period R3 on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, the specific effect is executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. It

<Step S3411>
When the flag in operation of the main movable accessory member is set to OFF (step S3408: No), the MPU 51 displays the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. A third touch operation effect execution command to be executed is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3411), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the touch operation effect in the third touch operation reception period R3 is executed on the display unit 391B.

  By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d (when an object is present in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341), the movable combination is performed. If the object member operating flag is set to ON, the touch operation effect is not executed by ignoring the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. However, there is a concern that the interest in the game may be diminished by the fact that the touch operation effect that should be originally executed is not executed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is movable in the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3 in which the touch operation effect can be executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. When the accessory member operating flag is set to ON, instead of executing the touch operation effect on the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, touch on the display portion 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. A specific effect different from the operation effect is executed. Therefore, in the first or third touch operation reception period R1, R3 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the symbol display portion 341, the touch operation effect is executed when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. Can be restricted. In addition, in the first or third touch operation reception period R1, R3, the visual recognition is not hindered when the main movable accessory member 39A is activated, instead of the touch operation effect on the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. The specific effect is executed on the display portion 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. Therefore, not only what type (expectation level) of touch operation performance is executed by the player performing the specific effect on the display unit that is not expected by the player, but also on which display unit the effect is executed. You can also focus on that. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from being diminished, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, on condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3, Even if the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A. Of course, a specific effect different from the touch operation effect may be executed on the display portion 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A on the condition that the lottery result is the probability variation big hit. As described above, on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B replaces the touch operation effect with the display portion of the main movable accessory member 39A. If the specific effect is executed in 392A, the interest of the game can be effectively improved, and if the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot, the interest of the game is further effectively improved. Can be made

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON in the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3, the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341. Although the specific effect is executed on the display section 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A instead of executing, the same effect as the touch operation effect may be executed on the display section 392C. That is, the touch operation effect that should be executed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B may be executed on the display portion 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A.

[Eighth Embodiment]
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 including the main movable accessory member 39A and the sub movable accessory member 39B having the display portion 391B has been described. Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the touch operation effect is executed not only on the symbol display portion 341 but also on the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, while the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON (a stage in which it is determined to operate the main movable accessory member member 39A (main movable accessory member member 39A). From the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is at the standby position immediately before the start of the operation) to the stage where the main movable accessory member 39A is confirmed to be returned and the main movable accessory member 39A is at the standby position. ), the case where the detection results of the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are ignored and execution of the touch operation effect is limited has been described.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is common with the above-described fourth embodiment in that the main movable accessory member and the sub movable accessory member having the display portion are provided, but the front side of the symbol display portion When the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON in the second touch operation reception period or the fourth touch operation reception period for executing the touch operation effect for the touch operation in the predetermined area, the sub movable state is set. A touch operation reception effect is executed on the display part of the accessory member, and a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display part of the main movable accessory member by a touch operation on the front side of the display part of the sub movable accessory member. The present embodiment is different from the above-described fourth embodiment in that

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described fourth embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the present embodiment, when the main movable accessory member 39A is activated during the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4, or during operation of the main movable accessory member 39A, the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4. When is started, the touch operation reception effect is executed in place of the touch operation effect on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B instead of the symbol display unit 341 on which the touch operation effect is executed. The presence of an object on the front side of the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B while the touch operation reception effect is being performed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4. Is detected (when a touch operation is performed), a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A.

  Although not shown, the second touch operation reception period R2 is started when the main movable accessory member 39A is activated during the second touch operation reception period R2 or while the main movable accessory member 39A is in operation. Also in this case, the touch operation reception effect is executed instead of the touch operation effect on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B instead of the symbol display unit 341 on which the touch operation effect is executed. Then, during the second touch operation reception period R2, while the touch operation reception effect is being performed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, the presence of the object on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. Is detected (when a touch operation is performed), a specific effect different from the touch operation effect is executed on the display unit 392A of the main movable accessory member 39A.

  Further, in the second touch operation acceptance period R2 or the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4, if the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is not set to ON, the touch operation effect is executed in the symbol display unit 341.

  It should be noted that the specific effect may be an effect indicating the degree of expectation for the jackpot lottery result (a jackpot expectation degree) or an effect unrelated to the jackpot lottery result, but in the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation degree is set. It is executed as the effect shown (see FIG. 40).

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIG. 63 and FIG. 64 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the touch operation effect execution processing executed in the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, at least a part of the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 and the period in which the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON overlap. In this case, the execution of the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341 is restricted, and the touch operation acceptance effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. When a touch operation is performed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B while the touch operation acceptance effect is being executed, the touch operation effect is different on the display unit 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C. The specific effect is executed.

<Step S3500>
As shown in FIG. 63, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3500). This effect execution command causes the symbol display section 341 to execute the touch operation effect, the display section 392C of the main movable auditors member 39C to execute a specific effect different from the touch operation effect, and the display section of the sub movable auditors member 39B. It is a command for executing the touch operation reception effect or the touch operation effect in 391B, and is transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S3105, S3107, S3511, S3513 described later, S3109, S3111, or S3516 in FIG. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is determined when the effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in steps S3105, S3107, S3511, S3513, and S3109, S3111, or S3516 of FIG. The determination can be made by setting the transmitted flag to be on and confirming whether or not the transmitted flag is set to be on.

  Here, when the MPU 51 has already transmitted the effect execution command (step S3500: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3514, and when the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3500: No), the process proceeds to step S3501. Transition.

<Step S3501>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3500: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D based on the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags (sub-movable). It is determined whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the display portion 391B of the accessory member 39B (step S3501). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the state (sub-touch operation state) of the touch operation (sub-touch operation) on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B corresponds to the sub-touch operation start or the sub-touch operation continuation. Specifically, when the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags is “off”, “on”, and “off”, the MPU 51 determines that the sub-touch operation state corresponds to the sub-touch operation start, and ~ When the combination of the third sub-touch operation pattern flags is "ON", "OFF", and "OFF", it is determined that the sub-touch operation state corresponds to the sub-touch operation continuation (see FIG. 46(B)).

  Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3108 in FIG. 64 and the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D perform the sub-touch operation. If it is not determined that is detected (step S3501: No), the process proceeds to step S3502.

<Step S3502>
When it is not determined that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3501: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 (see FIG. 27) (step S3502). . Whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2 can be determined by, for example, referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and also for determining whether or not it is the second touch operation reception period R2. You may judge by operating a counter. If the MPU 51 is in the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3502: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3503, and if it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3502: No), the process is stepped. The procedure moves to S3508.

<Step S3503>
In the case of the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3502: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main movable auditors member operating flag indicating that the main movable auditors member 39A is operating is set to ON. It is determined (step S3503). Here, when the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON (step S3503: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3504, and the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3503: NO), the process moves to step S3506.

<Steps S3504 and S3505>
When the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S3503: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the specific effect reception flag to ON (step S3504). This specific effect reception flag is displayed on the display section 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C when the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON in the second or fourth touch operation acceptance period R2, R4. It is a flag indicating that the touch operation for executing the touch operation effect is received by the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, and is referred to in step S3514 described later. Then, the MPU 51 transmits a touch operation reception effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S3605), and ends the touch operation effect execution process. As a result, instead of executing the touch operation effect for the second touch operation reception period R2 on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, the main movable operator is displayed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. A touch operation reception effect indicating that the touch operation for executing the touch operation effect is received is displayed on the display unit 392C of the object member 39C.

<Steps S3506 and S3507>
When the flag in operation of the main movable accessory member is set to OFF (step S3503: No), the MPU 51 performs the main touch by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether or not an operation is detected (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) (step S3506). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the state (main touch operation state) of the touch operation (main touch operation) on the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 corresponds to the start of touch operation or the continuation of touch operation. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines that the main touch operation state corresponds to the start of the main touch operation when the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags is “off”, “on”, and “off”. However, when the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags is “on”, “off”, and “off”, it is determined that the main touch operation state corresponds to the main touch operation continuation (FIG. 46(A. )reference). When the MPU 51 determines that the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3506: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2. A second touch operation effect execution command for setting is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3507), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the touch operation effect in the second touch operation reception period R2 is executed on the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, when the object does not exist in the predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (step S3506: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process without executing the touch operation effect.

<Step S3508>
When it is not the second touch operation reception period R2 (step S3502: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (see FIG. 27) (step S3508). Whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4 can be determined by, for example, referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and is also used to determine whether or not it is the fourth touch operation reception period R4. You may judge by operating a counter. If the MPU 51 is in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3708: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3509, and if it is not the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3708: No), the touch operation is performed. The production execution process ends.

<Step S3509>
In the case of the fourth touch operation reception period R4 (step S3508: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag indicating that the main movable accessory member member 39A is operating is set to ON. It is determined (step S3509). Here, when the main movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON (step S3509: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3510, and the main movable accessory member member-in-operation flag is set to OFF. If so (step S3509: NO), the process proceeds to step S3512.

<Steps S3510 and S3511>
When the main movable accessory member in-operation flag is set to ON (step S3509: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the specific effect reception flag to ON (step S3510) as in step S3504, and the touch operation reception effect. The execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3611), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, instead of executing the touch operation effect for the second touch operation reception period R2 on the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B, the main movable actor is displayed on the display portion 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. A touch operation reception effect indicating that the touch operation for executing the touch operation effect is received is displayed on the display unit 392C of the object member 39C.

<Steps S3512 and S3513>
When the main movable accessory member in-operation flag is set to OFF (step S3509: NO), the MPU 51 performs the main procedure based on the combination of the first to third main touch operation pattern flags by the same procedure as in step S3506. It is determined whether or not the main touch operation is detected by the detection sensors 38A and 38B (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display portion 341). Then, when it is determined that the main touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3512: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4. The fourth touch operation effect execution command for setting is set and transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3513), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended. As a result, the touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation reception period R4 is executed on the symbol display unit 341. On the other hand, when it is determined that the main touch operation is not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S3512: No), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process without executing the touch operation effect.

<Step S3514>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S3500: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the specific effect reception flag set to be turned on in step S3510 or S3516 is set to on (step S3514). Here, when the specific effect reception flag is set to ON (step S3501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3515 in FIG. 64, and the specific effect reception flag is set to OFF. (Step S3501: No), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S3515>
When the reception flag for specific effect is set to ON (step S3514: Yes), as shown in FIG. 64, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4. (Step S3515). Here, if the MPU 51 is in the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4 (step S3515: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3516, and if it is not the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4. (Step S3515: No), the process proceeds to step S3519.

<Step S3516>
In the case of the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4 (step S3515: Yes), the MPU 51 performs the same procedure as step S3501 of FIG. 63 based on the combination of the first to third sub-touch operation pattern flags. It is determined whether or not a sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (whether or not an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub-movable accessory member 39B) (step S3516). Here, when the MPU 51 determines that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3516: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3517, and the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D. If not determined (step S3516: NO), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Steps S3517 and S3518>
When it is determined that the sub-touch operation is detected by the sub-detection sensors 38C and 38D (step S3516: Yes), the MPU 51 causes the display unit 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C to perform a specific effect (an effect different from the touch operation effect). ) Is determined (step S3517). Then, the MPU 51 transmits a specific effect execution command for causing the display section 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C to execute the specific effect determined in step S3517 to the display control device 6 (step S3618), and the touch operation effect. The execution process ends. Thereby, instead of executing the touch operation effect for the second or fourth touch operation acceptance period R2, R4 on the symbol display unit 341, the specific effect is executed on the display unit 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C. ..

<Step S3519>
When it is not the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4 (step S3515: No) or when the specific effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S3618), the specific effect reception flag is set to OFF. , The touch operation effect execution processing is ended. That is, when the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4 is finished, or when it is determined that the specific effect is executed, the specific effect flag that allows the specific effect to be executed is turned off. And the acceptance for executing the specific effect is ended.

<Steps S3108 to S3111>
When an object exists on the front side of the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S3507: Yes), the MPU 51 is on condition that it is the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3. (Yes in step S3108 or S3110), and transmits the first or third touch operation effect execution command for executing the touch operation effect on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B to the display control device 6 (step S3109 or S3111). Then, the MPU 51 transmits the first or third touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S3109 or S3111), or when it is not the first touch operation reception period R1 or the third touch operation reception period R3 ( If No in step S3108 or S3110), the touch operation effect execution process ends.

  By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, if the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON when an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341, a plurality of detection sensors 38a to By ignoring the detection result of 38d, the touch operation effect is not executed. However, there is a concern that the interest in the game may be diminished by the fact that the touch operation effect that should be originally executed is not executed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, at least one of the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4 and the period during which the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. When the parts overlap, the execution of the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341 is restricted, and the touch operation acceptance effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B. When a touch operation is performed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B while the touch operation acceptance effect is being executed, the touch operation effect is different on the display unit 392C of the main movable accessory member 39C. The specific effect is executed. Therefore, in the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4 in which the touch operation effect can be executed in the symbol display unit 341, the touch operation is performed even when the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. Reception production is executed. In addition to that, in the second or fourth touch operation reception period R2, R4, instead of executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display portion 341, a sub movable accessory that is not visually impaired when the main movable accessory member 39A is activated. The touch operation reception effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the member 39B, and the specific effect is executed by performing a touch operation on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member member 39B during the execution of the touch operation reception effect. Therefore, the player performs a touch operation reception effect on an unexpected display section, and further performs a specific operation by performing a touch operation on the display section 391B of the sub movable accessory member 39B in response to an unexpected touch operation reception. .. As a result, the player can pay attention not only to what type (expectation level) of touch operation effect is executed, but also to which display unit the effect is executed. It is possible to suppress the fading of interest in the game and improve the enjoyment of the game.

  If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and the main movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON in the second touch operation reception period R2 or the fourth touch operation reception period R4. Instead of executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, the touch operation acceptance effect is executed on the display unit 391B of the sub movable accessory member member 39B, and the specific effect is executed on the display unit 392C of the main movable accessory member member 39C. Alternatively, the previous touch operation acceptance effect or the specific effect may be executed on the condition that the lottery result is a probability variation big hit. In this way, on the condition that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, instead of executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, the touch operation acceptance effect or the specific effect may be executed. For example, the interest in the game can be effectively improved, and the interest in the game can be more effectively improved by providing that the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot.

[Ninth Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, the movable accessory member operation effect in which the movable accessory member moves between the standby position and the operation position is executed, and the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d front side of the symbol display portion 341. The case of detecting the presence of an object in the predetermined area of is described. In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, when the movable accessory member member in-operation flag is set to ON (a stage in which it is determined to operate the movable accessory member member 39 (operation of the movable accessory member member 39 is (Immediately before the start) until the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed), the case where the detection results of the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored and the execution of the touch operation effect is limited has been described. .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in addition to the movable effect member operation effect, the fake operation in which the movable accessory member is moved between the standby position and the intermediate position set between the standby position and the operation position. This is different from the first embodiment in that an effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, one detection sensor 38 is provided, and the detection sensor 38 detects the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341, which is different from the first embodiment described above. different.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

  Here, FIG. 65 is a movable role which is referred to when the effect pattern type is the special reach effect in the movable accessory member operation timing determination process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the physical member operation timing selection table C. In FIG. 65, “∘” indicates that the movable accessory member 39 is activated as a big hit confirmation effect (one-shot notification effect), and “◯” indicates a movable object member as a chance up effect (big hit expectation suggesting effect). 39 is operated, “Δ” indicates that the movable accessory member 39 is fake operated (the movable accessory member is operated to the intermediate position instead of the standby position), and “x” indicates the movable accessory member 39. Is not activated, and "-" means that there is no corresponding activation period.

  Here, FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of the fake operation effect of the movable accessory member executed in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 66, in the fake operation effect, the movable accessory member 39 at the standby position moves to the intermediate position set between the operation position (the position indicated by the virtual line) and the standby position, and then the standby position. Return to. In addition, a detection sensor 38 that detects the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is arranged in the right central portion of the symbol display unit 341. The detection sensor 38 does not detect the movable accessory member 39 when the movable accessory member 39 is at the standby position or the intermediate position, and when the movable accessory member 39 is at the operating position, the movable accessory member 39 is not detected. Detected.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 65, the movable accessory member operation timing selection table C referred to when the effect pattern type is the special reach effect pattern, the effect pattern types (effect patterns Z1 to Z5) of the special reach effect patterns. For each, whether to operate the movable accessory member 39 at each of the operation timings G1 to G6 of the movable accessory member 39 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery (whether or not to execute the movable accessory member operation effect). Whether or not the movable accessory member 39 is fake-operated.

  For example, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Z1 and the lottery result is the 5R normal big hit, the movable accessory member 39 is fake operated at the operation timing G2 among the operation timings G1 to G6, and at the operation timing G3. The movable accessory member 39 is activated, and the movable accessory member 39 is not activated at the remaining operation timings G1, G4 to G6. That is, when the effect pattern Z1 is selected when the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a chance-up effect only immediately after the start of the super reach effect in the special reach effect pattern.

  Further, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Z3 and the lottery result is the 16R probability variable big hit, the movable accessory member 39 is operated at the operation timings G5 and G6 among the operation timings G1 to G6, and the remaining operations are performed. At timings G1 to G4, the movable accessory member 39 is neither activated nor fake. That is, when the effect pattern Z3 is selected when the lottery result is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the movable accessory member is used as a jackpot finalized effect (one notification effect) immediately after the start of the special reach effect in the special reach effect pattern and at the end thereof. The operation effect is executed.

  Further, when the effect pattern type is the effect pattern Z4 and the lottery result is the 16R probability variable jackpot, the fake operation effect is executed at the operation timing G2 of the operation timings G1 to G6, and the operation timings G3, G5, and G5. Then, the movable accessory member 39 is operated, and at the remaining operation timings G1 and G4, the movable accessory member 39 is neither operated nor fake operated. In addition, at the operation timings G5 and G6, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is executed as a big hit confirmation effect (one-shot notification effect). That is, when the effect pattern Z4 is selected when the lottery result is a 16R normal jackpot, the fake operation effect is executed immediately after the start of the normal reach effect in the special reach effect pattern, and it is movable as a chance up effect immediately after the start of the super effect effect. The accessory member member operation effect is executed, and further, immediately after the start of the special reach effect and at the end thereof, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed as a big hit confirmation effect (one notification effect).

  65 shows the movable accessory member operation timing selection table C referred to when the effect pattern type is the special reach effect, but when the effect pattern type is the normal reach effect pattern or the super reach effect pattern. Alternatively, the movable accessory member 39 may be fake operated.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
Here, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. In the movable accessory member operation process, in addition to the operation of the movable accessory member 39, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 to the intermediate position is controlled.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 67, in step S3601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39. That is, the MPU 51 starts the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 and 65) of the movable accessory member 39 in which the counter value of the variable display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the time point has been reached. Here, if it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3602, and if it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3601: No). The process moves to step S3606.

<Steps S3602 to S3605>
When it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 due to the fake operation (step S3602). When it is the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 due to the fake operation (step S3602: Yes), the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39 causes the movable accessory member 39 to move. A first operation start signal for moving from the standby position to the intermediate position is output (step S3603), and the movable accessory member operation process is ended. As a result, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a to move the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the intermediate position.

  On the other hand, when it is not the operation timing of the movable accessory member 39 by the fake operation (step S3602: No), that is, when it is the timing of operating the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operation position, the movable accessory member 39 is A second operation start signal for moving the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position is output to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force (step S3604). Then, the MPU 51 sets the movable accessory member operating flag to ON (step S3605), and ends the movable accessory member operating process. As a result, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a to move the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position.

<Steps S3606 and S3607>
When it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3601: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3606). That is, the MPU 51 ends the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 to 30) of the movable accessory member 39 in which the counter value of the variable display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the time point has been reached. Here, when it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3606: Yes), the MPU 51 outputs a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39. Then, (step S3607), the movable accessory member operating process is ended. Thus, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a to move the movable accessory member 39 from the operating position or the intermediate position to the standby position.

<Steps S3608 to S3610>
When it is not the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3606: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position based on the detection signal from the return detection unit 39b ( Step S3608). Here, when the movable accessory member 39 returns to the standby position (step S3608: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member 39 is returned from the intermediate position to the standby position based on the fake operation. Yes (step S3609). When it is the return of the movable accessory member 39 from the intermediate position to the standby position based on the fake operation (step S3609: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the movable accessory member operation process and moves the movable accessory member based on the fake operation. If 39 is not returned to the standby position (step S3609: No), that is, if the movable accessory member 39 is returned from the operating position to the standby position, the movable accessory member in-operation flag is set to OFF, and the movable object member 39 is moved. The accessory member operation processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the intermediate position, the detection sensor 38 does not detect the movable accessory member 39. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the intermediate position, that is, when the movable accessory member 39 fake, the touch operation effect is provided on the condition that the touch operation is performed during the touch operation acceptance period. Is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of the touch operation effect from being restricted even in the case of the fake operation of the movable accessory member 39, and to prevent the execution of the touch operation effect from being restricted more than necessary. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In this embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, the touch operation effect is executed by ignoring the detection signal from the detection sensor 38 as in the first embodiment. What is done may be restricted, or execution of the touch operation effect may be restricted by not performing the process of detecting and confirming from the detection sensor 38 as in the second embodiment. In other words, the execution of the touch operation effect is limited from the time it is determined to drive the motor 39a to move the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operation position until the driving of the motor 39a is started. May be started, and the restriction on execution of the touch operation effect may be released when the return detecting unit 39b detects that the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position.

  Further, when the period in which the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON and the touch operation reception period overlap, the specific effect (see FIG. 40) may be executed instead of the touch operation effect. .. In this case, the specific effect may be performed by the movable accessory member 39A having a display unit (see FIG. 54), and the movable accessory member 39A may be executed by the display unit, or the sub movable having the display unit. The accessory member may be provided (see FIG. 43 ), and may be executed on the display unit of the sub movable accessory member.

[Tenth Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, the movable accessory member operation effect in which the movable accessory member moves between the standby position and the operation position is executed, and the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d front side of the symbol display portion 341. The case of detecting the presence of an object in the predetermined area of is described. In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, when the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member 39 is operating is set to ON, detection by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. The case where the result is ignored and execution of the touch operation effect is limited has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory member is started (movable) when it is determined to be the operation start timing of the movable accessory member (timing for starting the movable effect member operation effect) in the touch operation reception period. This is different from the first embodiment in that the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect is limited by not executing the process of starting the accessory member operation effect.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
In the movable accessory member operating process of the present embodiment, a process of moving the movable accessory member between the standby position and the operating position is executed similarly to the movable accessory member operating process of the first embodiment. Is different from the movable accessory member operating process of the above-described first embodiment in that the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is not started in any of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. .

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 68, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the operation timings G1 to G6 of the movable accessory member 39 determined by the movable accessory member operation timing determination processing (step S2204 of the command determination processing of FIG. 23) (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the start time of is reached. Here, when it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3702, and when it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: No). The process moves to step S3705.

<Steps S3702 to S3704>
When it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3702). Whether or not it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 can be determined by, for example, referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. It may be determined by operating a counter for determining whether or not Here, when the MPU 51 is not in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3502: No), the MPU 51 operates the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39. Output the start signal. As a result, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a to move the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position. Then, the MPU 51 sets the return timing of the movable accessory member (step S3704), and ends the movable accessory member operating process.

  On the other hand, in the case of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S2702: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the movable accessory member operating process. That is, in the present embodiment, even at the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. Then, the movable accessory member operating process is ended. As a result, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (execution of the movable accessory member operation effect) in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 is limited.

<Step S3705>
When it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: No), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 set in step S3704 (step S3705). Here, when it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3705: Yes), the MPU 51 outputs a return signal to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a that applies the driving force to the movable accessory member 39. Then, (step S3706), the movable accessory member operating process ends. As a result, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a to move the movable accessory member 39 from the operating position to the standby position. On the other hand, when it is not the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3704: No), the MPU 51 ends the movable accessory member operating process.

  As described above, as the conventional gaming machine, as in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as the variable game effect, the movable accessory member actuation effect for actuating the movable accessory member or within the touch operation acceptance period. There is one in which a touch operation effect is executed by a player performing a touch operation on the front side of the symbol display unit. In this type of gaming machine, a touch operation effect may be unexpectedly executed due to the movable accessory member operating during the touch operation reception period. That is, the operation of the movable accessory member may be erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player, so that the touch operation effect may be executed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 that receive the touch operation for executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, the movable accessory member 39. Even at the operation start timing, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is not started, and the movable accessory member operation effect is not executed. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is executed because the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted in all of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, but at least the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The operation of the movable accessory member 39 may be limited during one touch operation acceptance period. For example, while the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is limited during the first and second touch operation acceptance periods R1 and R2, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is limited during the third and fourth touch operation acceptance periods R3 and R4. It is conceivable to execute the movable accessory member operation effect without performing.

[Eleventh Embodiment]
In the tenth embodiment described above, the movable accessory member is determined when it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (the timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The case where execution of the movable accessory member operation effect in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 is restricted by not executing the process of starting the operation of 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory member is started (movable) when it is determined to be the operation start timing of the movable accessory member (timing for starting the movable effect member operation effect) in the touch operation reception period. Although it is common with the above-described tenth embodiment in that the processing for starting the accessory member operation effect is not executed, the operation of the movable accessory member starts after the end of the touch operation reception period (the movable accessory member operation effect is generated). It is different from the tenth embodiment described above in that it is started).

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69 focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation processing executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
The movable accessory member operation process of the present embodiment is basically the same as the movable accessory member operation process of the tenth embodiment described above, but the start timing of the movable accessory member 39 is the first to fourth touches. If the operation reception period R1 to R4, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is suspended (step S3801), and the suspended operation of the movable accessory member 39 ends the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. It is different from the movable accessory member operating process of the tenth embodiment described above in that it is performed later (steps S3802, S3803, and S3703).

<Step S3801>
As shown in FIG. 69, when the MPU 51 is the start time point (operation start timing) of the operation timings G1 to G6 (see FIGS. 27 to 30) of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: Yes), the first operation. ~ When it is the fourth touch operation reception period R1 to R4 (step S3702: Yes), the accessory operation suspension flag is set to ON (step S3801). This accessory action suspension flag is a flag for starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) after the end of the first to fourth touch operation receiving periods R1 to R4, and the steps described below. It is referred to in S3802.

  In addition, when it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 51 is not in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3702: No), and the above-mentioned tenth step. Similar to the above embodiment, an operation start signal is output to the motor driver 39c to start the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3703), and the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 is set.

<Steps S3802 and S3803>
If neither the operation start timing nor the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 is reached (No in steps S3701 and S3705), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the accessory operation suspension flag, which is set to ON in step S3801, is set to ON. It is determined (step S3802). When the accessory operation suspension flag is set to ON (step S3802: Yes) and when it is not the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3803: No), the process proceeds to step S3703. That is, when the accessory operation suspension flag is set to ON (step S3802: YES), the operation start signal is output to the motor driver 39c at the end of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. Then, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (execution of the movable accessory member operation effect) is started (step S3703), and the movable accessory member 39 is moved from the standby position to the operation position. The movable accessory member 39 in the standby position outputs an operation start signal to the motor driver 39c at the return timing set in step S3704 (step S3705: Yes), as in the tenth embodiment described above. By doing so (step S3706), the vehicle is returned to the standby position.

  By the way, in the above-described tenth embodiment, when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member member 39 (the timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the movable accessory member. By not performing the process of starting the operation of the object member 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect), it is erroneously detected that the touch operation on the symbol display portion 341 is performed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39. To prevent that. However, since the movable accessory member operation effect in which the movable accessory member 39 operates is usually executed as a chance up effect or a big hit confirmation effect, if such an effect with high expectation is not executed, the interest in the game is high. There is a concern that the interest will be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, similarly to the tenth embodiment described above, the operation start timing of the movable accessory member member 39 (timing for starting the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. However, unlike the tenth embodiment described above, the touch operation reception period R1 is not executed although the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) is not executed when it is determined that After the completion of R4, the movable accessory member operation effect is executed. That is, it is erroneously detected that the touch operation on the symbol display portion 341 is performed by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 by preventing the movable accessory member operation effect from starting in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. While preventing this, after the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 are finished, the movable accessory member operation effect which is generally executed as an effect with high expectation is executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest or interest in the game. ..

  In the present embodiment, the suspended movable accessory member operation effect is started after it is confirmed after the end of the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, but the start timing of the suspended movable accessory member operation effect is It may be set regardless of the end of the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. For example, when the touch operation effect is executed, it may be after the end of the touch operation effect, or after it is confirmed that the touch operation on the symbol display unit 341 is performed. Further, the suspended movable accessory member operation effect ends the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 on condition that the player does not perform the touch operation on the symbol display portion 341 in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. You may start the execution later.

[Twelfth Embodiment]
In the tenth embodiment described above, the movable accessory member is determined to be the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The case where execution of the movable accessory member operation effect in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 is restricted by not executing the process of starting the operation of 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the touch operation reception period R1 to R4, the process of determining whether or not it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (the timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect). This is different from the tenth embodiment described above in that the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 is restricted by not performing the operation.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 70, the movable accessory member operation process of the present embodiment is different from the movable accessory member operation process of the tenth embodiment described above in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. It is first determined whether or not there is (step S3901), and if it is not the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3902: No), it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39. It is determined whether or not (step S3902). On the other hand, in the movable accessory member activation process of the present embodiment, if the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S3901: Yes), it is time to start the operation of the movable accessory member 39. It is determined whether or not it is the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 without executing the processing for determining (step S3902) (step S3905). In addition, when it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3902: Yes) and the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S3905: Yes), the subsequent processing procedure is the tenth step described above. It is similar to the embodiment.

  As described above, as the conventional gaming machine, as in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as the variable game effect, the movable accessory member actuation effect for actuating the movable accessory member or within the touch operation acceptance period. There is one in which a touch operation effect is executed by a player performing a touch operation on the front side of the symbol display unit. In this type of gaming machine, a touch operation effect may be unexpectedly executed due to the movable accessory member operating during the touch operation reception period. That is, the operation of the movable accessory member may be erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player, so that the touch operation effect may be executed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the touch operation acceptance period R1 to R4, is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member member 39 (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect). The process of determining whether or not it is not executed. That is, in the case of the touch operation reception period R1 to R4, the operation of the movable accessory member member 39 is not started, and execution of the movable accessory member operation effect is limited. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is executed because the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is restricted in all of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, but at least the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The operation of the movable accessory member 39 may be limited during one touch operation acceptance period. For example, while the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is limited during the first and second touch operation acceptance periods R1 and R2, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is limited during the third and fourth touch operation acceptance periods R3 and R4. It is conceivable to execute the movable accessory member operation effect without performing.

[Thirteenth Embodiment]
In the tenth embodiment described above, the movable accessory member is determined to be the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The case where execution of the movable accessory member operation effect in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 is restricted by not executing the process of starting the operation of 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) has been described.

  On the other hand, the present embodiment is basically determined to be the operation start timing of the movable accessory member (timing to start the movable accessory member operation effect) in the touch operation reception period as in the above-described tenth embodiment. In such a case, the process for starting the operation of the movable accessory member (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) is not executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the premium effect is exceptionally determined as the touch operation effect, the movable accessory member is operated when the specific condition is satisfied, which is different from the tenth embodiment. different. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the premium effect is executed as the touch operation effect, the front side of the symbol display section by the player is determined within a predetermined period from the start of the touch operation acceptance period. When the touch operation is not performed on the predetermined area of, the jackpot confirmation effect accompanied by the forced operation of the movable accessory member is executed, and the premium effect as the touch operation effect is produced by using the false detection due to the forced operation of the movable accessory member. Executed.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73 focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above.

  Here, FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of a continuous effect of the movable accessory member operation effect and the touch operation effect executed in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 71, in the present embodiment, a continuous effect of the movable accessory member operation effect and the touch operation effect is executed when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, when the premium effect is selected as the touch operation effect, depending on the player, from the start of the touch operation acceptance period R1 to R4 until the predetermined time set shorter than the touch operation acceptance period R1 to R4 elapses. When the touch operation is not performed, the jackpot confirmation effect (one-shot notification effect) accompanied by the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is executed, and the movable accessory member 39 is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d. Then, the premiere effect determined as the touch operation effect is executed.

  Here, the jackpot confirmation effect (one-shot notification effect) that accompanies the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is performed when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position, as shown in FIG. 71, for example. This is an effect to generate a rainbow effect Ef in the vicinity. In addition, as a jackpot finalized effect (one-shot notification effect) accompanied by the operation of the movable accessory member 39, for example, a rainbow lamp executed by a plurality of lamps 391 annularly arranged on the peripheral portion of the movable accessory member 39. It is conceivable that the effect, the operation mode of the movable accessory member 39 may be a special operation mode which is different from the normal mode. In addition, the premiere effect is an effect having an extremely low selection rate compared to other effects, and is an effect that clearly shows that at least the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit. In the present embodiment, the premium effect is a probability variation jackpot finalization effect that is selected only when the lottery result is a probability variation jackpot. For example, as shown in FIG. 71, a group of gold fish (goldfish group) is displayed in the symbol display unit 341. It is an image effect that moves from right to left. Of course, the premiere effect may be another effect such as an image effect in which an image of a rare character whose appearance rate is extremely low compared to other characters is displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
Here, FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation processing executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  The movable accessory member operation process of the present embodiment is performed when the movable accessory member operation start timing (timing for starting the movable accessory member operation effect) is determined in the touch operation reception period. It is common to the tenth embodiment described above in that the process of starting the operation (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) is not executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the premium effect is exceptionally determined as the touch operation effect, the player touches a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit within a predetermined period from the start of the touch operation reception period. When the operation is not performed, the jackpot confirmation effect accompanied by the forcible operation of the movable accessory member is executed, and the premium effect as the touch operation effect is executed by using the false detection due to the forcible operation of the movable accessory member. This is different from the tenth embodiment described above.

<Steps S4001 to S4006>
As shown in FIG. 72, when it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 has the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4002: Yes). When the movable accessory member operation process is finished, but is not in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4002: No), an operation start signal is output to the motor driver 39c to output the movable accessory object. The member 39 is moved from the standby position to the operating position (step S4003), the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 is set (step S4004), and the movable accessory member operating process is ended. As a result, similarly to the tenth embodiment described above, in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is not performed, so that the movable accessory member 39 is not operated. Operation is limited.

  Further, similarly to the tenth embodiment described above, the MPU 51, when it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S4001: No) and the return timing (step S4005: Yes), the motor driver 39c. A return signal is output to return the movable accessory member 39 from the operating position to the standby position (step S4006), and the movable accessory member operating process ends.

<Step S4007>
Even when the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 is not the return timing of the movable accessory member 39 (No in both steps S4001 and S4005), the MPU 51 executes a process different from that of the tenth embodiment described above. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4007), and if there is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4007: Yes). , The process proceeds to step S4008, and if it is not the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4007: No), the movable accessory member operation process ends.

<Step S4008>
In the case of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4007: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. (Step S4008) If the predetermined time has elapsed (Step S4008: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S4009, and if the predetermined time has not elapsed (Step S4008: No), the movable accessory member operation process. To finish. Here, the predetermined time is a limit for deciding to forcibly operate the movable accessory member 39, and the first to the first to execute the touch operation effect by utilizing the malfunction of the movable accessory member 39. It is set to a time shorter than the four-touch operation acceptance period R1 to R4. This predetermined time may be set to the same time in all of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, or may be set individually for each of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. Good.

<Step S4009>
When the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4008: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the forced operation flag is set to ON (step). S4009). This compulsory operation flag is a symbol display when a touch operation is not performed by the player until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, that is, before the predetermined time elapses. This is a flag for forcibly operating the movable accessory member 39 when the presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the portion 341 is not confirmed, and steps S4105 and S4109 of the touch operation effect execution process of FIG. 73 described later. , S4113 or S4117 is set to ON.

  Here, when the forced operation flag is set to ON (step S4009: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4010, and when the forced operation flag is not set to ON (step S4009: No), The movable accessory member operation processing is ended.

<Step S4010>
When the compulsory operation flag is set to ON (step S4009: Yes), the MPU 51 transmits a definite operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4010). As a result, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform the image effect associated with the forced operation of the movable accessory member 39. In the present embodiment, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 creates an image effect for generating a rainbow effect Ef (see FIG. 71) around the movable accessory member 39 at the timing when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position. The display unit 341 is caused to execute it.

  Then, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4003 when the definite operation effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6. As a result, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started, and the movable accessory member 39 is returned from the operating position to the standby position at the return timing set in step S4004 (steps S4004 to S4006). That is, when the touch operation is not performed even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (Yes in steps S4007 and S4008), the premium effect is determined as the touch operation effect. Accordingly, the movable accessory member 39 is forcibly operated based on the forced operation flag that is set to ON even when the operation start timings G1 to G6 (see FIG. 27) of the movable accessory member 39 are not reached.

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a touch operation effect execution process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  The touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment is basically the same as that of the tenth embodiment described above, but when the premium effect is determined as the touch operation effect, the movable auditor member member 39 is forcibly activated. This is different from the tenth embodiment described above in that the forced operation flag for is set to ON.

<Steps S4101 to S4105>
As shown in FIG. 73, in steps S4101 to S4103, it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the detection sensor 38 based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags, as in the above-described tenth embodiment. If the object exists in a predetermined area (specific area of the panel 25) on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 (step S4101: Yes), if it is the first touch operation acceptance period R1 (step S4102: Yes). A first touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the first touch operation effect in the first touch operation acceptance period R1 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4103).

  Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the first touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4103), unlike the above-described tenth embodiment, the premium effect is determined as the first touch operation effect. If yes (step S4104: YES), the compulsory operation flag that enables the compulsory operation of the movable accessory member 39 is set to ON (step S4105), and the touch operation effect execution process ends.

<Steps S4106 to S4109>
In steps S4106 and S4107, when the second touch operation reception period R2 is set (step S4106: Yes), the second touch operation presentation in the second touch operation reception period R2 is performed as in the tenth embodiment. A second touch operation effect execution command to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4107).

  Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the second touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4107), unlike the above-described tenth embodiment, the premium effect is determined as the second touch operation effect. If yes (step S4108: YES), the compulsory operation flag that enables the compulsory operation of the movable accessory member 39 is set to ON (step S4109), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Steps S4110 to S4113>
In steps S4110 and S4111, when the third touch operation acceptance period R3 is set (step S4110: Yes), the third touch operation presentation in the third touch operation acceptance period R3 is performed, as in the tenth embodiment. A third touch operation effect execution command to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4111).

  Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the third touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4111), unlike the above-described tenth embodiment, the premium effect is determined as the third touch operation effect. If yes (step S4112: YES), the compulsory operation flag that enables the compulsory operation of the movable accessory member 39 is set to ON (step S4113), and the touch operation effect execution process ends.

<Steps S4114 to S4117>
In steps S4114 and S4115, similarly to the tenth embodiment described above, in the case of the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 (step S4114: Yes), the fourth touch operation effect in the fourth touch operation acceptance period R4 is performed. A fourth touch operation effect execution command to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4115).

  Then, when the MPU 51 transmits the fourth touch operation effect execution command to the display control device 6 (step S4115), unlike the above-described tenth embodiment, the premium effect is determined as the fourth touch operation effect. When it is (step S4116: Yes), the compulsory operation flag that enables the compulsory operation of the movable accessory member 39 is set to ON (step S4117), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

  In the present embodiment, the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is not executed even at the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. The operation of the movable accessory member 39 is limited. As a result, it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect from being executed against the player's intention due to an erroneous detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member 39.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the premium effect is determined as the touch operation effect, the movable accessory member is used when there is no touch operation by the player when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. When 39 is forcibly operated, the jackpot confirmation effect is executed, and the premium effect determined as the touch operation effect is executed by the false detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member 39. Therefore, even if the touch operation is not executed while the touch operation is being accepted, the player can be surprised by the forced operation of the movable accessory member 39, which is difficult for the player to predict. And interest can be improved.

  Further, by using the false detection based on the forcible operation of the movable accessory member 39, the premium effect is forcibly executed as the touch operation effect regardless of the intention of the player, so that the selection rate that is actually selected is extremely high. It is possible to prevent the execution of the low premiere production from being skipped (cancelled). This makes it possible to reliably show the premier effect to the player when the predominant effect that is rarely seen is determined as the touch operation effect.

  In addition, by utilizing the erroneous detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member 39, "(touch operation effect →) jackpot confirmation effect accompanied by forced operation of the movable accessory member 39 → premiere effect" has never existed before. A shocking and interesting series of productions can be realized. As a result, interest and interest in the game can be significantly improved.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is limited by not executing the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. However, the method of limiting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 may be another method. For example, in the case of the touch operation reception period R1 to R4, the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is limited by not performing the process of determining whether it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39. Alternatively (for example, the twelfth embodiment).

  Further, the premiere effect may be executed as a jackpot confirmed effect instead of the probability variation jackpot confirmed effect.

  Further, in the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, the forced operation flag may be set to ON in all the touch operation reception periods of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, but the first to fourth touches may be set. The forced operation flag may be set to ON in at least one touch operation reception period of the operation reception periods R1 to R4. In this case, it is preferable that the forced operation flag can be set to ON in one or both of the third and fourth touch operation reception periods R3 and R4 in which the touch operation reception effect is executed.

[Fourteenth Embodiment]
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 including the two movable accessory members, the main movable accessory member 39A and the sub movable accessory member 39B having the display portion 391B, has been described. Further, the sub movable accessory member 39B of the fourth embodiment described above is moved between the standby position and the operating position within a range where it is not detected by the main detection sensors 38A, 38B.

  Further, in the tenth embodiment described above, in the gaming machine 10 including one movable accessory member 39, the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (the movable accessory member operation effect is produced during the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4). The case where the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) is not executed when it is determined that it is the start timing) has been described.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine according to this embodiment includes two movable accessory members (the main movable accessory member 39A and the sub movable accessory member 39B having the display portion 391B) similar to those of the above-described fourth embodiment. In the touch operation reception period, the process of starting the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is not executed, while the process of starting the operation of the sub movable accessory member 39B is executed, in the tenth embodiment described above. Is different from.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 74, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above.

[Movable accessory member operation processing]
Here, FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the movable accessory member operation process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the movable accessory member operating process of the present embodiment, the process of operating the main movable accessory member 39A is executed in the same procedure as the process of operating the movable accessory member 39 of the tenth embodiment described above ( Steps S4201 to S4206). In the movable accessory member operation process of the present embodiment, unlike the above-described tenth embodiment, the process of operating the sub movable accessory member 39B is executed in the same procedure as that of the above-described fourth embodiment. (Steps S4207 to S4210).

<Step S4201>
As shown in FIG. 74, in step S4201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4201). That is, in the MPU 51, the counter value of the variable display counter is determined based on the effect pattern type and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, the operation timings G2, G4, G6 of the movable accessory member 39 (see FIGS. 27 to 30). It is determined whether or not the value corresponding to the start time of is reached. Here, when it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4202, and when it is not the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (step S4201: No). ), and the procedural steps proceed to step S4205.

<Steps S4202 to S4204>
When it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4201: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4202). Whether or not it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 can be determined by, for example, referring to the counter value of the variable display counter, and the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. It may be determined by operating a counter for determining whether or not Here, when the MPU 51 is not in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4202: No), the motor driver that drives the first motor 39a1 that applies a driving force to the main movable accessory member 39A. An operation start signal is output to 39c (step S4203), and the movable accessory member operation process ends. Thus, the motor driver 39c controls the first motor 39a1 to move the main movable accessory member 39A from the standby position to the operating position. Then, the MPU 51 sets the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4204), and ends the movable accessory member operating process.

  On the other hand, in the case of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4202: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the movable accessory member operating process. That is, in the present embodiment, even at the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A, the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is started in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. Without performing, the movable accessory member operation processing is ended. As a result, the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 is limited.

<Steps S4205 to S4210>
When it is not the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4201: No), the MPU 51 drives the first motor 39a1 when it is the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A (step S4205: Yes). A second operation of outputting a return signal to the driver 39c (step S4206) and applying a driving force to the sub movable accessory member 39B when the operation start timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B is reached (step S4207: Yes). An operation start signal is output to the motor driver 39c that drives the motor 39a2 (step S4208), and when it is the return timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B (step S4209: Yes), the sub movable accessory member 39B is driven. A return signal is output to the motor driver 39c that drives the second motor 39a2 that applies force (step S4210).

  It should be noted that the MPU 51 uses any of the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A, the return timing of the main movable accessory member 39A, the operation start timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B, and the return timing of the sub movable accessory member 39B. If there is not any (No in steps S4201, S4205, S4207, and S4209), the movable accessory member operation process is ended. Also, when the operation start signal or the return signal is output to the motor driver 39c (step S4206, S4208, or S4210), the movable accessory member operation process is ended.

  By the way, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, by not performing the process of starting the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the main movable accessory The operation of the member 39A is restricted. This prevents erroneous detection that a predetermined region on the front side of the symbol display portion 341 has been touch-operated based on the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the process of starting the operation of the sub movable accessory member 39B is executed in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, and the sub movable accessory member 39B is executed. Operation is not limited. Here, the sub movable accessory member 39B of the present embodiment is moved between the standby position and the operating position within a range that is not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. That is, in the present embodiment, erroneous detection does not occur even if the sub movable accessory member 39B is actuated. Therefore, since the operation of the sub movable accessory member 39B is not limited, it is possible to prevent the operation from being unnecessarily limited to the operation of the sub movable accessory member 39B in which no malfunction occurs. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous by preventing the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect from being excessively restricted, and to suppress a decrease in interest and interest in the game.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is performed by not executing the process of starting the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. Although limited, the method of limiting the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A may be another method. For example, in the case of the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, the operation of the main movable accessory member 39A is restricted by not executing the process of determining whether it is the operation start timing of the main movable accessory member 39A. Alternatively (see the twelfth embodiment described above).

  Further, in this embodiment, the sub movable accessory member 39B includes the display portion 391B, but the sub movable accessory member 39B may not include the display portion 391B.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the main movable accessory member member production effect is restricted in the reception period R1 to R4, the execution of the main movable accessory member member production effect is suspended, and the suspended main movable accessory member member is suspended. The operation effect may be executed after the reception periods R1 to R4 have ended or after the touch operation effect has ended (see the eleventh embodiment described above).

[Fifteenth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, when the presence of an object is detected by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d, the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON. The case has been described in which the detection result of the object is ignored and execution of the touch operation effect is limited.

  In the tenth embodiment described above, when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the movable accessory member 39 (the timing at which the movable accessory member operation effect is started) in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the movable prize is determined. The case where the process of starting the operation of the object member 39 (starting the movable auditors member member operation effect) is not executed has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the touch operation reception period and the execution period of the movable accessory member operation effect overlap, the execution of the touch operation effect is limited when the movable accessory member operation effect is started first. In the case where the touch operation acceptance period is started first, the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect is limited, which is different from the first and tenth embodiments.

  For example, when the movable accessory member operation effect is started before the touch operation acceptance period R1 to R4, the movable accessory member is in operation as in the touch operation effect execution process of the first embodiment. While the flag is set to ON, the detection results of the objects by the plurality of detection sensors 38a to 38d are ignored, and execution of the touch operation effect is limited (see FIG. 37). Of course, in this embodiment, the same configuration as that of the above-described second to ninth embodiments is adopted, and the same touch operation effect execution processing as that of the above-described second to ninth embodiments is executed, so that the moving operation is performed. The execution of the touch operation effect may be restricted during the operation of the accessory member.

  When the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4 start before the movable accessory member operation effect, the movable accessory members are moved in the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, as in the tenth embodiment. When it is determined that it is the operation start timing of 39 (the timing of starting the movable accessory member operation effect), the process of starting the operation of the movable accessory member member 39 (starting the movable accessory member operation effect) is not executed. Thus, the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect is limited (see FIG. 68). Of course, in the present embodiment, by adopting the same configuration as the above-described first to fourteenth embodiments and executing the same movable accessory member operation processing as in the above-described first to fourteenth embodiments, Execution of the movable accessory member operation effect may be restricted during the touch operation acceptance period.

  The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has an advantage when the execution of the touch operation effect is restricted during the operation of the movable accessory member, and the execution of the movable accessory member operation effect is restricted during the touch operation acceptance period. You can enjoy the benefits of. That is, in the case where the touch operation reception period overlaps with the execution period of the movable accessory member operation effect, in the case where the movable accessory member operation effect is started first, or when the touch operation reception period is started first. Even if there is, the touch operation effect is prevented from being unnecessarily executed due to the false detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member 39.

[Sixteenth Embodiment]
In the above-described fourth embodiment, the case where the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 is detected by the two main detection sensors 38A and 38B has been described. Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, the case where the two main detection sensors 38A and 38B cannot detect the presence of an object in the operation region of the sub movable accessory member 39B (the left side region of the symbol display portion 341) has been described. ..

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit except the left side region of the symbol display unit is detected by the two main detection sensors. In addition to the two main detection sensors, it differs from the above-described fourth embodiment in that a sub-detection sensor that detects the presence of an object in the front side area of the left side area of the symbol display unit is provided. That is, in the present embodiment, the main detection sensor and the sub detection sensor have different detection ranges in the symbol display portion, and the presence of an object is individually detected by each detection sensor. Then, when the movable accessory member does not operate and is in the standby position, the presence of an object is detected by both the main detection sensor and the sub detection sensor, and when the movable accessory member operates, the symbol is displayed only by the sub detection sensor. It is also different from the above-described first embodiment in that the presence of an object is detected in the front side area of the left side area of the section. In addition, the present embodiment does not include the sub movable accessory member 39B in the above-described fourth embodiment, but includes the movable accessory member corresponding to the main movable accessory member 39A in the fourth embodiment. Different from the embodiment.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described fourth embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 75 is a front view schematically showing the detection ranges of the detection sensors 38A, 38B, 38D with respect to the symbol display portion 341 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a movable accessory member 39, a first main detection sensor 38A, a second main detection sensor 38B, and a sub detection sensor 38E.

  The movable accessory member 39 is a member similar to the movable accessory member 39 of the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment and the main movable accessory member 39A of the above-described fourth embodiment, and is a symbol display portion. Between a predetermined first standby position (see FIG. 4) located above 341 and a second operating position (see FIG. 5) set below the first standby position, the first motor 39a1 It is possible to move up and down along the surface of the symbol display portion 341 by the driving force from.

  The first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B are the same as the first and second main detection sensors 38A and 39B of the above-described fourth embodiment, and the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A. The presence of an object is detected in the overlapping range of the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B. The overlapping detection range of the detection range of the first main detection sensor 38A (see FIG. 42A) and the detection range of the second main detection sensor 38B (see FIG. 42B) is on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. It is a central region excluding the left part (the operation region of the sub movable accessory member 39B), the lower part, the upper right part and the lower right part, and the touch operation in the operation region of the movable accessory member 39 can be detected.

  The sub detection sensor 38E is arranged to the left of the second main detection sensor 38B, and detects the presence of an object in the left side area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. The detection range of the sub detection sensor 38E does not overlap with the overlapping detection range of the first and second main detection sensors 38A and 38B. That is, the sub detection sensor 38E can detect a touch operation in the left side region of the operation region of the movable accessory member 39, which cannot be detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. That is, the detection range is shared by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B, and the sub detection sensor 38E, and the central region within the operating range of the movable accessory member 39 and the movable accessory member. The presence or absence of a touch operation is individually detected in the left side area outside the operation range of 39.

  In the present embodiment, the touch operation state is determined based on the touch operation detection flags for three times by the same method as in the first embodiment described above, and the touch operation states are the first to third touch operation pattern flags. Are stored in the RAM 412 as a combination of ON and OFF (see FIG. 22B).

[Touch operation effect execution process]
Here, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a touch operation effect execution process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  In the touch operation effect execution process of the present embodiment, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B capable of detecting the operation of the movable accessory member 39 when the movable accessory member 39 is in operation during the touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4. Whether or not there is a touch operation in the front left side area of the symbol display portion 341 is determined based on the detection result of the sub detection sensor 38E that cannot detect the operation of the movable accessory member 39 without checking the detection result. When the movable accessory member 39 is not in operation in the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, the presence or absence of the touch operation is determined based on the detection results of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B, and the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. If the touch operation is not confirmed based on the detection result of the sub detection sensor 38E, the presence or absence of the touch operation is determined based on the detection result of the sub detection sensor 38E.

<Step S4301>
As shown in FIG. 76, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4301), and is the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4. (Step S4301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4302, and if the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 are not satisfied (step S4301: No), the touch operation effect execution process ends.

<Step S4302>
In the case of the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 (step S4301: YES), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4302). This effect execution command is a command for executing the touch operation effect on the symbol display unit 341, and is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S4306 or S4308 described later. Whether or not the effect execution command has been transmitted to the display control device 6 is set such that the transmitted flag is set to ON when the touch effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S4306 or S4308 described later, for example. Then, it can be determined by checking whether or not the transmitted flag is set to ON. By determining whether or not the effect execution flag has been transmitted in step S4301, it is possible to prevent the touch operation effect from being repeatedly started. However, when it is determined that the main touch operation in the main touch operation state is started after the end of the touch operation effect (when it is determined that an object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341), the touch operation is performed. The touch operation effect may be executed again on the condition that it is during the reception period.

  Here, if the effect execution command has been transmitted (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the touch operation effect execution process, and if the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S4302: No), the process is performed. The process moves to S4303.

<Step S4303>
When the effect execution command has not been transmitted (step S4302: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the movable accessory member operating flag indicating that the movable accessory member is operating is set to ON ( Step S4303). Here, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (step S4303: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4307, and the movable accessory member operating flag is set to OFF. In that case (step S4303: No), the process proceeds to step S4304.

<Step S4304>
When the movable accessory member operating flag is set to off (step S4303: No), the MPU 51 is based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags for the central region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. It is determined whether or not a touch operation has been detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (whether or not an object exists in the central region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341) (step S4304). Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S4304: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4306, and the touch operation is not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. If it is determined that it is (step S4304: NO), the process proceeds to step S4305.

<Step S4305>
When it is determined that the touch operation is not detected by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B (step S4304: No), the MPU 51 determines the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags for the left area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. Based on this, it is determined whether or not a touch operation has been detected by the sub-detection sensor 38E (whether or not an object exists in the front left side region of the symbol display unit 341) (step S4305). Here, when it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensor 38E (step S4305: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S4306, and determines that the sub detection sensor 38E does not detect the touch operation. In the case (step S4305: No), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S4306>
When it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the main detection sensors 38A, 38B or the sub detection sensor 38E (Yes in step S4304 or S4305), the MPU 41 determines the touch operation effect determined in the touch operation effect determination processing of the command determination processing. A touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S4306), and the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Step S4307>
When the movable accessory member in-operation flag is set to ON (step S4303: Yes), the MPU 51 is based on the combination of the first to third touch operation pattern flags for the left side region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. It is determined whether or not a touch operation has been detected by the sub detection sensor 38E (whether or not an object exists in the front left area of the symbol display unit 341) (step S4307). That is, when the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (when the movable accessory member 39 is operating) (step S4303: YES), a touch operation on the central region by the main detection sensors 38A and 38B. It is determined whether or not a touch operation on the left side region is detected by the sub detection sensor 38E without determining whether or not is detected.

  Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensor 38E (step S4307: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4308, and it is determined that the touch operation is not detected by the sub detection sensor 38E. In the case (step S4307: No), the touch operation effect execution process is ended.

<Steps S4308 and S4309>
When it is determined that the touch operation is detected by the sub detection sensor 38E (step S4307: Yes), the MPU 41 determines an alternative touch operation effect determination process for determining an alternative touch operation effect to be executed in the left side area of the symbol display unit 341. Is executed (step S4308). Then, the MPU 41 sets an alternative touch operation effect execution command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the alternative touch operation effect and transmits it to the display control device 6 (step S4308). As a result, the alternative touch operation effect is executed in the left side area of the symbol display portion 341. That is, when the movable accessory member 39 is in operation in the first to fourth touch operation acceptance periods R1 to R4, in the left side area of the symbol display portion 341, the visibility is not obstructed by the movable accessory member 39 in the operating position. The alternative touch operation effect is executed.

  As described above, in the gaming machine in which the touch operation effect and the movable accessory member operation effect are executed, the touch operation effect can be executed by erroneous detection when the movable accessory member 39 is operated.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, while the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON (the stage when it is determined to operate the movable accessory member 39 (the movable accessory member). From the stage where the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position immediately before the operation of 39A is started) to the stage where the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position after the return of the movable accessory member 39 is confirmed). The touch operation is not detected by the first main detection sensor 38A and the second main detection sensor 38B. That is, in the present embodiment, the main detection sensors 38A, 38B and the sub detection sensor 38E have different detection ranges, and the presence or absence of an object in each detection range is individually detected. Therefore, even if the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is started after the movable accessory member operating flag is set to ON, it is possible to restrict the execution of the touch operation effect, and of course the movable accessory member 39 is on standby. It is also possible to limit execution of touch operation effects before returning to the position. As a result, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the touch operation effect is executed because the operation of the movable accessory member 39 is erroneously detected as the touch operation performed by the player. Can be prevented.

  By the way, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the operating position, the player can visually recognize the left side area of the symbol display portion 341 and the like. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is operating in the first to fourth touch operation reception periods R1 to R4, when the touch operation is performed on the left side area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341. Then, the alternative touch operation effect is executed in the left side area of the symbol display portion 341. As a result, even when the movable accessory member 39 is operated, it is possible to effectively use the touch operation reception periods R1 to R4 to execute the (alternative) touch operation effect, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. It

  The alternative touch operation effect may be an image to be displayed in the central area of the symbol display section 341 as the touch operation effect, and may be displayed in the left area of the symbol display section 341, which is completely different from the touch operation effect. An image may be displayed.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a sub-display device in the left side area on the front side of the symbol display portion 341, accepts a touch operation on this sub-display device, and touch effect or alternative touch operation on the sub-display device. The effect may be executed. In this case, even if the movable accessory member 39 is operating, execution of the touch effect on the sub-display is not limited. Further, the sub-display may be provided in a movable accessory member that is movable (for example, in the left-right direction) in the left side area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is operating in the touch operation reception period R1 to R4, the main detection sensors 38A and 38B do not check the detection result of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B to detect an object. Execution of the touch operation effect due to the existence is limited, but by ignoring the detection results of the main detection sensors 38A, 38B when the movable accessory member 39 is operating, the objects are detected by the main detection sensors 38A, 38B. The execution of the touch operation effect due to the existence may be limited.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position, the main detection sensors 38A, 38B and the sub detection sensor 38E detect the presence of an object, while the movable accessory member 39 is in the standby position. The presence of the object is detected only by the sub-detection sensor 38E when it does not exist, but by some of the main detection sensors 38A and 38B and the sub-detection sensor 38E when other conditions (specific conditions) are satisfied. It is also possible to detect the presence of an object. For example, when some of the two main detection sensors 38A and 38B and one sub detection sensor 38E are out of order, the presence of an object may be detected by the remaining detection sensors that are not out of order. Okay, in the operation check of the movable accessory member 39 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the movable accessory member 39 is individually detected by each of the two main detection sensors 38A and 38B and one sub detection sensor 38E. It is possible to check whether or not each of the detection sensors 38A, 38B, 38E is out of order by determining whether or not is in the operating position.

[Outline of the Invention]
The outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be additionally described below. It should be noted that in order to provide an understanding of the correspondence between each appendix and each embodiment, a reference numeral or the like may be added for convenience, but the invention according to the appendix is limited to a specific configuration with the reference numeral. Not a thing. Further, it is also possible to select each configuration and each processing function described below and combine them arbitrarily.

[Appendix A0]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game,
An image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed,
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
Detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) when moved between a first position (standby position) and a second position (operating position), and when moved between the first position and the second position A movable accessory member (39),
Production execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the course of the game,
Equipped with
The effect execution means (51),
First effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) for a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable effect member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Production restriction means for limiting execution of one of the first production and the second production in an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second production overlap.
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A0, execution of one of the first effect and the second effect is restricted by the effect restriction unit in the overlapping period. Therefore, when the detection unit detects that an object is present in the predetermined area, it is erroneously detected as being based on the motion of the player, and thus the first effect is executed. It can be prevented from occurring.

[Appendix A1]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A0, wherein the effect limiting means limits the execution of the first effect in the overlapping period.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, the execution of the first effect is restricted by the effect restricting means in the overlapping period, so that the operation of the movable accessory member is erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player. It is possible to prevent the detection effect from being executed due to this.

[Appendix A2]
The effect restricting means (38a) detects the detecting means (38a) during a specific period from when it is determined that the movable accessory member (39) is actuated until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position. ~ 38d), if the presence of an object is detected, the execution of the first effect is limited, the gaming machine according to supplementary note A1.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A2, execution of the first effect in the specific period is restricted even when the presence of the object is detected by the detection unit, and thus the first effect is erroneously detected by a simple process in the overlapping period. Can be prevented from being executed.

[Appendix A3]
The effect restricting means (38a) detects the detecting means (38a) during a specific period from when it is determined that the movable accessory member (39) is actuated until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position. ~ 38d) restricts the execution of the process of confirming whether or not the presence of an object is detected, the gaming machine according to Appendix A1.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A3, since the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the detection unit is not executed in the specific period, execution of the first effect in the overlapping period can be limited, and thus a simple process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detection effect from being executed due to the false detection.

[Appendix A4]
A driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position,
The effect restricting means starts the restriction of the execution of the first effect from when it is determined to drive the driving means (39a) to when the driving of the driving means (39a) is started. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A4, the execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the movable accessory member is activated by the drive means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A5]
When the movable accessory member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position, it is detected that the movable accessory member (39) is returned from the second position to the first position. A return detection means (39b),
The effect restricting means cancels the restriction on the execution of the first effect when the return detecting means (39b) detects that the movable accessory member (39) has returned to the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A4, characterized in that

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A5, the restriction on execution of the first effect is lifted when the return of the movable accessory member is detected. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A6]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The effect execution means (51) causes the determination result of the determination means (41) to shift the second effect to the special game state in an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when it is executed as an effect (big hit confirmation effect, one-shot notification effect) that clearly indicates that the object is the predetermined area. The game machine according to Supplementary Note A0, wherein the game effect of the type according to the situation when the presence of the object is detected.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A6, when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected when executing the effect that clearly shows that the determination result is to shift to the special game state in the overlapping period, A type of game effect according to the situation when the presence of an object is detected is executed. Therefore, it is possible to restrict the execution of the first effect throughout the game effect in a situation where arousing the game is likely to occur. As a result, the excitement for the game is prevented, and the interest for the game is improved. In addition, in a situation in which the excitement of the game is unlikely to occur, it is possible to execute the first effect as scheduled, so that it is possible to prevent the first effect from becoming meaningless.

[Appendix A7]
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the overlapping period, the effect execution means (51) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area. The game machine according to Supplementary Note A6, wherein an effect according to the type of the game effect being executed is executed.

[Appendix A8]
The game effect includes an information game effect (fluctuation game effect) executed in an information game (fluctuation game) that informs the player of the determination result of the determination means (41),
The notification game effect includes a basic effect (high-speed fluctuation effect) that is executed from the start of the information game, a first development effect (normal reach effect) that can be executed after the basic effect is finished, and a first development effect. Including a second development effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) that can be executed after execution,
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during the overlapping period, the effect limiting means is performing the second development effect, and if the second effect is the first effect. Limit execution,
The effect execution means (51),
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A7, further comprising: a specific effect executing unit that executes a specific effect different from the first effect when the effect limiting unit restricts the execution of the first effect.

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary note A7 and supplementary note A8, an effect is executed according to the type of game effect executed when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the overlapping period. For example, when the game effect executed when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection unit in the overlapping period is the second development effect, a specific effect different from the first effect is executed. Therefore, as the first effect, even if the low-expectation effect is determined, which can hardly be expected to cause the determination result to shift to the special game state, the low-expectation effect is executed after the operation of the movable accessory member. Since this is prevented, the amusement of the game is prevented and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A9]
The first effect execution means is executing the basic effect or the first development effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the overlapping period. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A8, characterized in that the first effect is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A9, even when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection unit in the overlapping period, the first effect execution is performed when the basic effect or the first development effect is being executed. The first effect is executed by the means. Therefore, at the timing when it is difficult to revive even if the low expectation effect is executed, even if the object is detected in the overlapping period due to the operation of the movable accessory member, the first effect is executed as scheduled, so that the game is performed. It is possible to prevent meaninglessness of the first effect while preventing arousal of the first effect.

[Appendix A10]
The predetermined period includes a first predetermined period (third touch operation reception period, fourth touch operation reception period) in which an effect (touch operation reception effect) that clearly indicates to the player that the predetermined time period is performed is executed.
The effect executing means (51) executes the first effect by the effect limiting means when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) in the first predetermined period. The gaming machine according to supplementary note A8 or supplementary note A9, characterized in that the specific demonstration execution means executes a specific demonstration different from the first demonstration.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A10, when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection unit during the first predetermined period (during reception effect execution), execution of the first effect is restricted by the effect restriction unit, and is specified. A specific effect different from the first effect is executed by the effect executing means. That is, in the case where the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means by the operation of the movable accessory member, the specific effect is executed in place of the first effect during the first predetermined period (during reception effect execution). It Therefore, as the first effect, even if the low-expectation effect is determined, which can hardly be expected to cause the determination result to shift to the special game state, the low-expectation effect is executed after the operation of the movable accessory member. Since this is prevented, the amusement of the game is prevented and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A11]
The predetermined period includes a second predetermined period (first touch operation reception period) in which an effect (touch operation reception effect) that clearly indicates to the player that the predetermined period is not executed,
The effect executing means (51) executes the first effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) in the second predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A6 to A10.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A11, the first effect is executed in the second predetermined period even when the presence of the object in the predetermined region is detected by the detection unit in the overlapping period. Therefore, at the timing when it is difficult to revive even if the low-expectation effect is executed, even if the object is detected in the second predetermined period due to the operation of the movable accessory member, the first effect is executed as scheduled. , It is possible to prevent meaninglessness of the first effect while preventing arousal of the game.

[Appendix A12]
The specific effect has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) for the determination result of the determination means (41) to shift to the special game state, as compared with the first effect. The gaming machine according to any one of the supplementary notes A6 to A11.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A12, since the specific effect has a relatively higher degree of expectation than the first effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled, after the operation of the movable accessory member, Amusement for games is effectively prevented, and interest for games is effectively improved.

[Appendix A13]
The specific effect is a finalized effect that clearly indicates that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state, according to any one of the additional notes A6 to A12. Amusement machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A13, since the specific effect is the final effect, the awakening for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than in the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A14]
The final effect is a normal final effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare final effect (premier effect that has a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal final effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to Appendix A13, wherein the specific effect is the rare fixed effect.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A14, the specific effect is a rare finalized effect, so that the excitement for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. Therefore, the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A15]
A second image display means (391B) different from the image display means (341),
It is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position) by the effect executing means (51), and is second movable provided with the second image display means (391B). Accessory member (39B),
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
Further equipped with,
The movable accessory member (39A) is moved by the detection means (38A, 38B) when moved between the first position (first standby position) and the second position (first operating position). Detected and not detected by the second detection means (39C, 39D),
When the second movable accessory member (39B) is moved between the third position (first standby position) and the fourth position (first operating position), the detection means (38A, 38B). ) Is not detected by
The first effect execution means, when the presence of an object in the specific area is detected by the second detection means (38C, 38D) during a second predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period), the image display means (341). ) To execute the first effect (touch operation effect),
The effect limiting unit does not limit the execution of the first effect on the image display unit (341) in a second overlapping period in which the second predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. The gaming machine described in Appendix A0.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A15, the execution of the first effect and the second effect is not restricted by the effect restriction unit in the second overlapping period in which the second predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. Therefore, even if the predetermined period and the second predetermined period for executing the first effect and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the first effect is unnecessarily executed by the second image display means. Is prevented from being performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution frequency of the first effect from being extremely reduced, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

[Appendix A16]
The effect restricting means is configured to detect the means (38A) during a specific period from when the movable accessory member (39A) is determined to be actuated until the movable accessory member (39A) returns to the first position. , 38B), the execution of the first effect is limited when the presence of an object is detected, the gaming machine according to supplementary note A15.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A16, execution of the first effect in the specific period is limited even when the presence of the object is detected by the detection unit, and therefore the first effect is executed by erroneous detection by simple processing. Can be prevented.

[Appendix A17]
The effect restricting means is configured to detect the means (38A) during a specific period from when the movable accessory member (39A) is determined to be actuated until the movable accessory member (39A) returns to the first position. , 38B) restricts execution of a process for confirming whether or not the presence of an object is detected by the game machine according to supplementary note A15.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A17, since the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the detection unit is not executed, the execution of the first effect in the specific period can be limited, and thus the false detection is performed by the simple process. Thus, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed.

[Appendix A18]
A driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable accessory member (39A) between the first position and the second position;
The effect execution means (51) limits execution of the first effect between when it is determined to drive the drive means (39a) and when driving of the drive means (39a) is started. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A15 to A17, which is started.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A18, execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the movable accessory member is operated by the drive means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the first detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A19]
When the first movable accessory member (39A) is moved from the first position to the second position, the first movable accessory member (39A) is returned from the second position to the first position. A return detection means (39b) for detecting that
The effect restricting means cancels the restriction on the execution of the first effect when the return detecting means (39b) detects that the movable accessory member (39A) has returned to the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A15 to A18, characterized in that

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A19, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is lifted when the return of the movable accessory member is detected. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A20]
The coverage of the image display means (341) when the movable accessory member (39A) is in the second position is the image when the second movable accessory member (39B) is in the fourth position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A15 to A19, which is larger than the coverage with respect to the display means (341).

[Appendix A21]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A15 to A20, wherein the movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) have different operation frequencies in the game effect.

[Appendix A22]
A second image display means (391B, 392C) different from the first image display means (341),
The effect execution means (51),
When execution of the first effect on the image display means (341) is restricted by the effect restriction means, a specific effect different from the first effect is executed on the second image display means (381B, 392C). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A0, further comprising a specific effect executing means for causing the effect.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A22, when the execution of the first effect on the image display means is restricted by the effect restriction means in the overlapping period, the specific effect different from the first effect on the second image display means by the specific effect execution means. Is executed. This specific effect is executed by the second image display means when the detection means detects the presence of an object in a predetermined area based on the operation of the movable accessory member in the overlapping period. That is, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means by utilizing the erroneous detection of the object by the detection means. As a result, the specific effect is executed instead of the first effect based on an erroneous detection in the predetermined period, so that not only the execution of the first effect can be restricted but also the execution of the first effect is restricted. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the case of playing.

  Further, since the specific effect is executed by the second image display means instead of the image display means by which the first effect is to be executed, the specific effect is executed by the second image display means that the player does not expect, It is possible to focus not only on what type (expectation level) of the effect is executed, but also on which image display means the effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from being diminished, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix A23]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
Compared to the first effect, the specific effect is characterized by a higher expectation (big hit expectation) for the determination result of the determination means (41) to shift to the special game state. The gaming machine described in Appendix A22.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A23, since the specific effect has a relatively higher degree of expectation than the first effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled, the operation after the movable accessory member operates. Amusement for games is effectively prevented, and interest for games is effectively improved.

[Appendix A24]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A22 or Supplementary Note A23, wherein the specific effect is a finalized effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determining means (41) is to shift to the special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A24, since the specific effect is the final effect, the awakening for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than in the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A25]
The final effect is a normal final effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare final effect (premier effect that has a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal final effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to Appendix A24, wherein the specific effect is the rare fixed effect.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A25, the specific effect is a rare fixed effect, so that the awakening for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved more effectively.

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A22 to A25, wherein the second image display means (391C) is provided on the movable accessory member (39C).

[Appendix A27]
A second movable accessory member (39B) that is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position) and is not detected by the detection means (38A, 38B);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting an object when the object exists in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (392B),
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A22 to A26, characterized in that the second image display means (392B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary note A26 and supplementary note A27, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means provided on the movable accessory member or the second movable accessory member by utilizing the erroneous detection of the object by the detecting means. It As a result, when the movable accessory member is in the second position for a predetermined period that causes erroneous detection, the specific effect is executed by the second image display means, so the operation of the movable accessory member and the specific effect are combined. By doing so, the enjoyment of the game can be significantly improved as compared with the case where the movable accessory member is simply activated.

[Appendix A28]
A second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341),
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
Different from the first image display means (341) and the second image display means (391B), a third image display means (392A) provided on the movable accessory member (39A),
Further equipped with,
The first effect execution means, when the presence of an object in the specific area is detected by the second detection means (38C, 38D) during a second predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period), the second image display means. (391B) to execute the first effect,
The effect limiting unit limits the execution of the first effect on the second image display unit (391B) in a second overlapping period in which the second predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap.
When the execution effecting means (51) restricts the execution of the first effect on the second image display means (391B) during the second overlap period, the effect on the third image display means (392B) is changed to the first effect. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A0, further comprising a specific effect execution unit that executes a specific effect different from the effect.

[Appendix A29]
A second movable accessory member (39B) that is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position) and is not detected by the detection means (38A, 38B). The gaming machine according to Appendix A28, wherein the second image display means (391B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary note A28 and supplementary note A29, when the presence of an object in the specific region is detected by the second detection unit during the second overlap period, instead of executing the first effect by the second image display unit. The third image display means executes a specific effect different from the first effect. As a result, when the movable accessory member is operated in the second overlapping period, the specific effect is executed by the third image display means provided on the movable accessory member that the player does not expect, so what type is it? It is possible to focus not only on whether the effect of (expectation) is executed, but also on which image display means the effect is executed. Further, since the specific effect is executed by the third image display means provided on the movable accessory member, the operation of the movable accessory member and the specific effect are combined, so that the movable accessory member is simply operated. The interest in the game can be significantly improved as compared with the case where the game is played.

[Appendix A30]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition,
The specific effect has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) for the determination result of the determination means (41) to shift to the special game state, as compared with the first effect. The gaming machine described in Additional Note A28 or Additional Note A29.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A30, the specific effect has a relatively higher degree of expectation than the first effect, so that after the operation of the movable accessory member, as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. Amusement for games is effectively prevented, and interest for games is effectively improved.

[Appendix A31]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition,
The specific effect is a finalized effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state, according to any one of the additional notes A28 to A30. Amusement machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A31, since the specific effect is the final effect, the awakening for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A32]
The final effect is a normal final effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare final effect (premier effect that has a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal final effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A31, wherein the specific effect is the rare fixed effect.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A32, the specific effect is a rare finalized effect, so that the excitement for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. Therefore, the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A33]
A second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341),
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
Different from the first image display means (341) and the second image display means (391B), a third image display means (392A) provided on the movable accessory member (39A),
Further equipped with,
The effect performing means (51) replaces the first effect when the effect limiting means limits the execution of the first effect on the first image display means (341) during the overlapping period. The second image display unit (381B) executes the first specific effect that clearly indicates the predetermined period, and the third image display unit (392C) displays when an object is detected in the specific region during the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A0, further comprising: a specific effect executing unit that executes a second specific effect different from the first effect and the first specific effect.

[Appendix A34]
Further comprising a second movable accessory member (39B) which is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position) and is not detected by the detection means (38A, 38B),
The gaming machine according to Appendix A33, wherein the second image display means (391B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A34, when the effect limiting means limits the execution of the first effect on the image display means in the overlapping period, the first specific effect is executed on the second image display means instead of the first effect. Then, the first effect and the second specific effect different from the first specific effect are executed by the third image display means on condition that the presence of the object in the specific area is detected. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the case where the execution of the first effect is simply limited. Further, when the movable accessory member is at the first position in the overlapping period, the second specific effect is executed by the third image display means provided on the movable accessory member, so that the operation of the movable accessory member and the first By combining the two specific effects, the enjoyment of the game can be significantly improved as compared with the case where the movable accessory is simply operated.

[Appendix A35]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition,
The second specific effect has a higher degree of expectation (big hit expectation degree) with respect to the determination result of the determination means (41) relatively shifting to the special game state, as compared with the first effect. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A33 or Supplementary Note A34.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A35, the second specific effect has a relatively higher degree of expectation than the first effect, so that after the operation of the movable accessory member, the first effect is executed as scheduled. Amusement for games is effectively prevented, and interest for games is effectively improved.

[Appendix A36]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition,
The game according to supplementary note A33 or supplementary note A34, characterized in that the second specific effect is a finalized effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A36, since the second specific effect is the final effect, the effect on the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than in the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented, and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A37]
The final effect is a normal final effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare final effect (premier effect that has a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal final effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to Appendix A36, wherein the second specific effect is the rare fixed effect.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A37, the specific effect is a rare finalized effect, so that the excitement for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved more effectively.

[Appendix A38]
The movable accessory member (39) is movable between the first position and an intermediate position between the first position and the second position,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A0, wherein the effect limiting means enables execution of the first effect when the movable accessory member (39) is in the intermediate position during the predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A38, execution of the first effect is limited when the movable accessory member is at the second position for a predetermined period, while the first effect is performed when the movable accessory member is at the intermediate position. The execution of is not limited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to the operation of the movable accessory member being erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player, and the movable accessory member is positioned at the intermediate position. It is possible to prevent the execution of the first effect from being unnecessarily limited in the case of.

[Appendix A39]
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38) when the movable accessory member is in the second position in the predetermined period, the effect execution means (51) The gaming machine according to supplementary note A38, further comprising a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect different from the one effect.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A39, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection unit for the object when the movable accessory member is at the second position for a predetermined period, the first effect is performed by the specific effect execution unit. A specific effect different from is executed. That is, the specific effect is executed by utilizing the erroneous detection of the object by the detection means. In this way, the specific effect is executed instead of the first effect based on the erroneous detection in the predetermined period, so that not only the execution of the first effect can be limited but also the execution of the first effect is limited. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the case of being played.

[Appendix A40]
The movable accessory member (39) further includes a second image display means (392C) different from the image display means (341),
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A39, wherein the specific effect execution unit causes the second image display unit (392C) to execute the specific effect when execution of the first effect is restricted.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A40, the specific effect is executed by the second image display means different from the image display means rather than the image display means for which the first effect is to be executed. Therefore, not only what kind of (expectation) effect is executed by the second image display means that the player does not expect, but also by which image display means the effect is executed. You can also focus on that. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from being diminished, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix A41]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition,
Compared to the first effect, the specific effect is characterized by a higher expectation (big hit expectation) for the determination result of the determination means (41) to shift to the special game state. The gaming machine according to supplementary note A39 or supplementary note A40.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A41, since the specific effect has a relatively higher degree of expectation than the first effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled, after the operation of the first movable accessory member. Amusement for games is effectively prevented, and interest for games is effectively improved.

[Appendix A42]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A39 or supplementary note A40, wherein the specific effect is a finalized effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determining means (41) is to shift to the special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A42, the specific effect is the finalized effect, so that the awakening effect on the game after the operation of the first movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented, and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix A43]
The final effect is a normal final effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare final effect (premier effect that has a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal final effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A42, wherein the specific effect is the rare fixed effect.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A43, the specific effect is a rare finalized effect, so that the excitement for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved more effectively.

[Appendix A44]
The detection means (38) is
When the movable accessory member (39) is at the intermediate position, the presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the image display unit (341) is not detected,
When the movable accessory member (39) is in the second position, it is detected that an object is present in the predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341). A gaming machine according to any one of 1.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A44, the presence of the object is detected by the detection unit during a predetermined period while preventing the first effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection when the movable accessory member (39) is at the intermediate position. When it is detected, the first effect can be executed.

[Appendix A45]
In the specific period from when it is determined that the movable accessory member (39) is operated to the second position until the movable accessory member (39) is returned to the second position, The gaming machine according to appendix A38, wherein execution of the first effect is restricted when the presence of an object is detected by the detection means (38).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A45, execution of the first effect in the specific period is limited even when the presence of the object is detected by the detection unit, and therefore the first effect is executed by erroneous detection by simple processing. Can be prevented.

[Appendix A46]
The effect restricting means is configured to detect the detecting means (38) during a specific period from when the movable accessory member (39) is determined to be actuated until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position. ) Restricts the execution of the process of confirming whether or not the presence of an object is detected by the above).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A46, since the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the detection unit is not executed, the execution of the first effect in the specific period can be restricted, and thus the false detection is performed by a simple process. Thus, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed.

[Appendix A47]
Further comprising drive means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable accessory member (39) among the first position, the intermediate position and the second position,
The drive means (39a) is determined after it is determined that the effect limiting means drives the drive means (39a) to move the movable accessory member (39) from the first position to the second position. The game machine according to supplementary note A45 or supplementary note A46, characterized in that the limitation of execution of the first effect is started before the drive of No.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A47, execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the movable accessory member is operated by the drive means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A48]
When the movable accessory member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position, it is detected that the movable accessory member (39) is returned from the second position to the first position. A return detection means (39b),
The effect restricting means releases the restriction on the execution of the first effect when the return detecting means (39b) detects that the movable accessory member (39) has returned to the second position. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A45 or Supplementary Note A46.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A48, the restriction on execution of the first effect is lifted when the return of the movable accessory member is detected. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A49]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A0, wherein the effect limiting means limits the execution of the second effect in the overlapping period.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A49, since the execution of the second effect can be limited in a predetermined period, it is erroneously detected that the player has operated the image display means based on the operation of the movable accessory member. It is possible to prevent the first effect from being unnecessarily executed due to this.

[Appendix A50]
The game according to supplementary note A49, characterized in that the effect limiting means limits the execution of the process for starting the second effect when it is determined that it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A50, the second effect in the predetermined period is limited by limiting the execution of the process for starting the second effect even when it is determined that it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period. Since it is possible to limit the execution of the first effect, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix A51]
When the timing for starting the second effect is the predetermined period, the second effect executing means causes the second effect to be executed when a certain period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in Appendix A50.

[Appendix A52]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A51, wherein the time when the predetermined period has elapsed is the end of the predetermined period.

[Appendix A53]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A51 or supplementary note A52, wherein the time when the certain period of time has elapsed is the end time of the first production when the first production is executed.

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary notes A51 to A53, when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the second effect is executed when a certain period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period. Therefore, while preventing erroneous detection that the operation of the image display means is performed due to the operation of the movable accessory member, at the time when a certain period elapses from the start of the predetermined period, for example, the predetermined period or the first effect. After the end, the second effect, which is generally executed as an effect with high expectations, is executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in and interest in the game.

[Appendix A54]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A49, wherein the effect executing means (51) restricts execution of a process of confirming whether or not it is a timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A54, the execution of the second effect in the predetermined period can be restricted by restricting the execution of the process of confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period. It is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix A55]
The first effect has a higher probability of being executed by the first effect executing means and a lower probability of being executed by the first effect executing means (51) than the normal effect, and the determining means (41) ) Includes a rare effect (premier effect) that clearly indicates that the determination result in () is to shift to the special game state,
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during the predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period), the second effect execution means causes the first effect means to perform the first effect. When it is determined that the rare effect is executed as the effect, the detection unit (38a to 38d) causes the detection unit (38a to 38d) to perform the operation until the forced operation time set to a time shorter than the predetermined period elapses. When the presence of an object in a predetermined area is not detected, the second effect is shifted to the special game state by the forced operation of the movable accessory member (39) before the predetermined period has elapsed. Perform as a performance that clearly indicates that there is,
The first effect executing means detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area by the forced operation of the movable accessory member (39) by the detecting means (38a to 38d), and thus, as the first effect. The gaming machine according to Appendix A0, characterized in that the rare effect is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A55, when it is determined that the rare effect is to be executed as the first effect, the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means from the start of the predetermined period until the forced operation time elapses. Is not detected, the movable accessory member is forcibly activated before the elapse of a predetermined time. Since such a forced actuation of the movable accessory member which is not expected by the player can give a surprise or shock to the player, interest and interest in the game can be improved. Further, since the detection effect is executed by utilizing the false detection due to the forcible operation of the movable accessory member, the player can be sure to see the first effect. Then, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note A55, a rare effect that clearly indicates that the determination result is to shift to the special game state is executed as the first effect, so the rare effect is caused by an erroneous detection due to the operation of the movable accessory member. When the rare effect that can rarely be seen is determined as the detection effect by being executed, the rare effect can be surely shown to the player, and an unexpected movable accessory member By executing the rare effect in addition to the operation of, it is possible to further surprise and shock the player. As a result, the interest and interest of the game can be further improved.

[Appendix A56]
A game state transition means (41) for transitioning the game state between the information game state in which the information game for informing the determination result of the determination means (41) is executed and the special game state,
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The special game state is a first special game state in which the first special game is executed (5R normal jackpot game state) and a second special game state in which the second special game is executed (5R probability variation jackpot game state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) and
The notification game state includes a first notification game state and a second notification game state in which the determination means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special game state than the first notification game state. ,
The game state transition means (41) shifts to the first notification game state after the end of the first special game, and shifts to the second notification game state after the end of the second special game,
The rare effect clearly indicates that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to be transferred to the second special game state by the game state transfer means (41) after the notification game is finished. The gaming machine according to supplementary note A55.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A56, the rare effect is an effect that clearly indicates that the determination result by the determination means is to shift to the (second) special gaming state ((probably changed) jackpot gaming state). That is, the rare effect is executed as an effect that clearly indicates that the (second) special game state ((probably changed) jackpot game state) is to be shifted due to erroneous detection due to the forced operation of the movable accessory member. This allows the player to know that the determination result is advantageous before the notification game ends, when the rare effect is executed after the compulsory actuation of the movable accessory member. Can be improved.

[Appendix A57]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A55 or supplementary note A56, wherein the effect limiting unit limits execution of the second effect when the first effect is not the rare effect.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A57, execution of the second effect in the overlapping period is restricted by the effect restricting means when the first effect is not a rare effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed against the player's will due to an erroneous detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A58]
The detection means (38a-) is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position), and is moved between the third position and the fourth position. 38d) further comprises a second movable accessory member (39B),
The second effect execution means executes a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) of moving the second movable accessory member (39B) between the third position and the fourth position,
The effect restricting means can restrict the execution of the second effect by the movable accessory member (39A) executed by the second effect executing means in the overlapping period, and the second movable accessory member ( 39B) does not limit the execution of the second effect, the gaming machine described in Appendix A0.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A58, since the execution of the second effect by the first movable accessory member can be limited in the predetermined period, the predetermined area on the front side of the image display means based on the operation of the first movable accessory member. Again, it is prevented from being erroneously detected as an operation performed by the player.

  Further, the second movable accessory member is not detected by the detecting means when the object is moved between the third position and the fourth position. Therefore, erroneous detection by the detection means does not occur due to the operation of the second movable accessory member, and thus it is possible to prevent the operation of the second movable accessory member that does not cause erroneous detection from being unnecessarily limited. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect from being monotonous by preventing the execution of the movable accessory effect from being excessively restricted, and to suppress a decrease in interest in and interest in the game.

[Appendix A59]
When it is determined that it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period, the effect restricting means restricts the execution of the process of starting the operation of the first movable accessory member. The gaming machine described in appendix A58.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A59, even if it is determined that it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in a predetermined period, a process of starting the operation of the first movable accessory member is performed. Since the execution of the first movable accessory effect in the predetermined period can be restricted by limiting the execution, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix A60]
When the timing for starting the first movable accessory effect is the predetermined period, the effect restricting unit causes the second movable accessory member to perform the second operation when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to supplementary note A59, characterized in that an effect is executed.

[Appendix A61]
The gaming machine according to appendix A60, wherein the time when the predetermined period has elapsed is the end of the predetermined period.

[Appendix A62]
The game machine according to supplementary note A60, wherein the time point when the certain period of time has elapsed is the end time point of the first effect when the first effect is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A60 to supplementary note A62, when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period, when the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period, The second effect by one movable accessory member is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the first movable accessory member from being erroneously detected as an operation on the image display unit, and at the time when a certain period of time elapses from the start of the predetermined period, for example, the predetermined period or the first period. After the end of the effect, the second effect by the first movable accessory member, which is generally executed as a highly expected effect, is executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest or interest in the game.

[Appendix A63]
The effect limiting means limits the execution of the process for confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period, and the effect is described in A58. Amusement machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A63, execution of the second effect in the predetermined period is restricted by restricting execution of a process of confirming whether or not it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix A64]
The coverage of the image display means (341) when the first movable accessory member (39A) is at the second position is the same as when the second movable accessory member (39B) is at the fourth position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A58 to A63, which has a larger coverage than the image display means (341).

[Appendix A65]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A58 to A64, wherein the first movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) have different operation frequencies in the game effect. ..

[Appendix A66]
The effect limiter can limit the execution of the second effect when the predetermined period starts before the overlapping period, and when the execution period starts before the overlapping period. The gaming machine according to appendix A0, wherein execution of the first effect can be limited.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A66, when the predetermined period starts before the overlapping period, the execution of the second effect is limited, and thus it is detected that the object is present in the predetermined region by the operation of the movable accessory member. The means is prevented from erroneously detecting, and the execution of the first effect is restricted when the execution period is started earlier than the overlapping period, whereby the movable accessory member is actuated so that an object is present in a predetermined area. It is possible to prevent the detection unit from erroneously detecting the existence. Therefore, when the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the operation of the movable accessory member is performed regardless of whether the predetermined period is started first or the execution period is started first. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection based on erroneous detection, and it is possible to prevent unnecessary detection performance from being performed based on erroneous detection.

[Appendix B1]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game,
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
An image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed,
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
Detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) when moved between a first position (standby position) and a second position (operating position), and when moved between the first position and the second position A movable accessory member (39),
Production execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the course of the game,
Equipped with
The effect execution means (51),
First effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) for a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable effect member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Equipped with
In the overlap period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, an effect that clearly shows that the determination result of the determination means (41) shifts the second effect to the special game state ( When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when executed as a jackpot finalization effect, one-shot notification effect), the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected. A gaming machine, which executes the game effect of a type according to the situation of the case.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected when executing the effect that clearly shows that the determination result is to shift to the special game state in the overlapping period, A type of game effect according to the situation when the presence of an object is detected is executed. Therefore, it is possible to restrict the execution of the first effect throughout the game effect in a situation where arousing the game is likely to occur. As a result, the excitement for the game is prevented, and the interest for the game is improved. In addition, in a situation in which the excitement of the game is unlikely to occur, it is possible to execute the first effect as scheduled, so that it is possible to prevent the first effect from becoming meaningless.

[Appendix B2]
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the overlapping period, the effect execution means (51) detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area. The game machine according to Supplementary Note B1, wherein an effect according to the type of the game effect being executed is executed.

[Appendix B3]
The game effect includes an information game effect (fluctuation game effect) executed in an information game (fluctuation game) that informs the player of the determination result of the determination means (41),
The notification game effect includes a basic effect (high-speed fluctuation effect) that is executed from the start of the information game, a first development effect (normal reach effect) that can be executed after the basic effect is finished, and a first development effect. Including a second development effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) that can be executed after execution,
The effect execution means (51),
If the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the overlapping period, and the second development effect is being executed, an effect restriction that restricts the execution of the first effect. Means and
Specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect different from the first effect when the effect limiting means restricts the execution of the first effect;
The gaming machine according to Appendix B2, further comprising:

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary note B2 and supplementary note B3, effects corresponding to the type of game effect executed when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means in the overlapping period are executed. For example, when the game effect executed when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection unit in the overlapping period is the second development effect, a specific effect different from the first effect is executed. Therefore, as the first effect, even if the low-expectation effect is determined, which can hardly be expected to cause the determination result to shift to the special game state, the low-expectation effect is executed after the operation of the movable accessory member. Since this is prevented, the amusement of the game is prevented and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B4]
The first effect execution means is executing the basic effect or the first development effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) in the overlapping period. , The game machine according to Appendix B3, characterized in that the first effect is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B4, even if the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection unit in the overlapping period, the first effect execution is performed when the basic effect or the first development effect is being executed. The first effect is executed by the means. Therefore, at the timing when it is difficult to revive even if the low expectation effect is executed, even if the object is detected in the overlapping period due to the operation of the movable accessory member, the first effect is executed as scheduled, so that the game is performed. It is possible to prevent meaninglessness of the first effect while preventing arousal of the first effect.

[Appendix B5]
The predetermined period includes a first predetermined period (third touch operation reception period, fourth touch operation reception period) in which an effect (touch operation reception effect) that clearly indicates to the player that the predetermined time period is performed is executed.
The effect executing means (51) executes the first effect by the effect limiting means when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) in the first predetermined period. And a specific effect different from the first effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. The game machine according to Note B3 or Note B4.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B5, when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting unit during the first predetermined period (during reception effect execution), execution of the first effect is restricted by the effect restricting unit and is specified. A specific effect different from the first effect is executed by the effect executing means. That is, in the case where the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means by the operation of the movable accessory member, the specific effect is executed in place of the first effect during the first predetermined period (during reception effect execution). It Therefore, as the first effect, even if the low-expectation effect is determined, which can hardly be expected to cause the determination result to shift to the special game state, the low-expectation effect is executed after the operation of the movable accessory member. Since this is prevented, the amusement of the game is prevented and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B6]
The predetermined period includes a second predetermined period (first touch operation reception period) in which an effect (touch operation reception effect) that clearly indicates to the player that the predetermined period is not executed,
The effect executing means (51) executes the first effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) in the second predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B5.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B6, the first effect is executed in the second predetermined period even when the presence of the object in the predetermined region is detected by the detection unit in the overlapping period. Therefore, at the timing when it is difficult to revive even if the low-expectation effect is executed, even if the object is detected in the second predetermined period due to the operation of the movable accessory member, the first effect is executed as scheduled. , It is possible to prevent meaninglessness of the first effect while preventing arousal of the game.

[Appendix B7]
The specific effect has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) for the determination result of the determination means (41) to shift to the special game state, as compared with the first effect. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes B1 to B6.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B7, since the specific effect has a relatively higher degree of expectation than the first effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled, the operation after the movable accessory member is activated Amusement for games is effectively prevented, and interest for games is effectively improved.

[Appendix B8]
The specific effect is a finalized effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state, according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B7. Amusement machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B8, since the specific effect is the final effect, the awakening for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than in the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix B9]
The final effect is a normal final effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare final effect (premier effect that has a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal final effect. ) And
The game machine according to Appendix B8, wherein the specific effect is the rare fixed effect.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B9, the specific effect is a rare finalized effect, so that the excitement for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than in the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved more effectively.

[Appendix C1]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game,
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition;
A game state transition means (41) for transitioning the game state between the informing game state in which the informing game for informing the determination result of the determining means (41) is executed and the special game state,
An image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed,
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
Detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) when moved between a first position (standby position) and a second position (operating position), and when moved between the first position and the second position A movable accessory member (39),
Production execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the course of the game,
Equipped with
The effect execution means (51),
A first effect execution unit that executes a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection unit (38a to 38d) during a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period). ,
In the predetermined period, the movable accessory member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position so that the determination result of the determination means (41) shifts to the special game state. When the expectation improving effect (opportunity increasing effect) for improving the expectation degree is executed, the detecting means (38a to 38d) causes the movable accessory in the predetermined area by executing the expectation improving effect. When the presence of a member is detected, it is possible to execute a final effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C1, when the presence of the movable accessory member in the predetermined area is detected by executing the expectation improving effect in which the movable accessory member operates, the final effect can be executed. Is. That is, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means triggered by the operation of the movable accessory member, even if it is erroneously detected as due to the movement of the player by the player, The confirmation effect is executed by utilizing the false detection. In other words, the problem that arousing awakening due to the execution of the first effect, which has a low degree of expectation of shifting to the special game state after the operation of the movable accessory member, can be solved by using false detection as a wrong hand. be able to.

[Appendix C2]
The effect executing means (51) executes the finalized effect when the predetermined effect is executed when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) in the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in appendix C1, which is possible.

[Appendix C3]
The game effect includes an information game effect (fluctuation game effect) executed in an information game (fluctuation game) that informs the player of the determination result of the determination means (41),
The notification game effect includes a basic effect (high-speed fluctuation effect) that is executed from the start of the information game, a first development effect (normal reach effect) that can be executed after the basic effect is finished, and a first development effect. Including a second development effect (super reach effect, special reach effect) that can be executed after execution,
The gaming machine according to Appendix C2, wherein the predetermined effect is the second development effect.

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary note C2 and supplementary note C3, if the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detecting means for a predetermined period, if the predetermined effect (for example, the second development effect) is being executed, the fixed effect is executed. Can be done. That is, when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means by the operation of the movable accessory member, the fixed effect can be executed during execution of the predetermined effect such as the second development effect. Therefore, as the first effect, even if the low-expectation effect is determined, which can hardly be expected to cause the determination result to shift to the special game state, the low-expectation effect is executed after the operation of the movable accessory member. Since this is prevented, the amusement of the game is prevented and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C4]
The predetermined period includes a first predetermined period (third touch operation reception period, fourth touch operation reception period) in which an effect (touch operation reception effect) that clearly indicates to the player that the predetermined time period is performed is executed.
The effect executing means (51) can execute the finalized effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) in the first predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix C1 to Appendix C3.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C4, when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection unit during the first predetermined period (during execution of the reception effect), the fixed effect can be executed. That is, when the presence of an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means by the operation of the movable accessory member, the final effect can be executed during the first predetermined period (during reception effect execution). Therefore, as the first effect, even if the low-expectation effect is determined, which can hardly be expected to cause the determination result to shift to the special game state, the low-expectation effect is executed after the operation of the movable accessory member. Since this is prevented, the amusement of the game is prevented and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C5]
The final effect is an effect that is executed after the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position, and the movable accessory member (39) moves from the first position to the second position. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C4, which is a demonstration accompanied by movement (confirmed demonstration B).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C5, after the operation of the movable accessory member is completed, the effect accompanied by the operation of the movable accessory is executed again as the finalized effect. That is, the finalized effect is executed as the second operation accessory member operation effect of the continuously executed movable accessory member operation effect. Therefore, the fixed effect is executed as an unexpected effect. Further, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the movable accessory member is activated again after the movable accessory member is returned. As a result, the player can continue to have an interest in the effect even after the end of the movable accessory member effect, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C6]
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The special game state is a first special game state in which the first special game is executed (5R normal jackpot game state) and a second special game state in which the second special game is executed (5R probability variation jackpot game state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) and
The effect execution means (51) moves the movable accessory member (39) from the first position when the expectation improving effect is executed by moving the movable accessory member (39). When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) triggered by the movement to the second position, the determination result of the determination means (41) is the second special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C5, characterized in that the finalized effect is executed on condition that the game machine is to be moved to.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C6, the final production is executed on condition that the determination result is to shift to the second special game state in which the second special game, which is more advantageous to the player than the first special game, is executed. To be done. For example, the determination result is a second special game state in which the probability of being judged by the judging means to be changed to the special game state is higher than that of the first notification game, and the second notification game is moved to after the special game. The fixed effect is executed under the condition that Therefore, if the player performs the finalized effect when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means triggered by the operation of the movable accessory member, the determination result is from the first special game state. Also, since it is possible to know that the game is to be shifted to the second special game state which is advantageous to the player, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C7]
The final effect is a normal final effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare final effect (premier effect that has a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal final effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes C1 to C6, wherein the finalization effect is the rare finalization effect.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C7, since the finalized effect is a rare finalized effect, it can be easily known that the determination result is to shift to the second special gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state. Therefore, the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix D1]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game,
A first image display means (341) displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed,
A second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341),
A first movable accessory member (39A) that is moved between a first position (first standby position) and a second position (first operating position);
A second movable accessory member (39B) that is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position) and is provided with the second image display means (391B);
First detection means (38A, 38B) for detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the first image display means (341);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
Production execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341), the first movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) to execute a game effect in the course of the game.
Equipped with
When the first movable accessory member (39A) is moved between the first position (first standby position) and the second position (first operating position), the first detection means (38A). , 38B) and not the second detection means (39C, 39D),
When the second movable accessory member (39B) is moved between the third position (first standby position) and the fourth position (first operating position), the first detection means (38A). , 38B),
The effect execution means (51),
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the first detection unit (38A, 38B) during a first predetermined period (touch operation reception period), and during the second predetermined period (touch operation reception period), the identification is performed. First effect execution means for causing the first image display means (341) to execute a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the area is detected by the second detection means (38C, 38D). ,
Second effect execution means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the first movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Execution of the first effect on the first image display means (341) is restricted in a first overlapping period in which the first predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, and the second predetermined period and the Production limiting means that does not limit the execution of the first production on the first image display means (341) in a second overlapping period in which the execution period of the second production overlaps;
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D1, the execution of one of the first effect and the second effect is restricted by the effect restriction unit in the first overlapping period in which the first predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. To be done. Therefore, when the first detection means detects that an object exists in the predetermined area, it is erroneously detected as being based on the motion of the player, and thus the first effect is executed. It is possible to prevent inconvenience. On the other hand, the effect limiting unit does not limit the execution of the first effect and the second effect in the second overlapping period in which the second predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. Therefore, even if the predetermined period (first predetermined period and second predetermined period) for executing the first effect and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the second image display unit unnecessarily. The execution of the first effect to be executed is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution frequency of the first effect from being extremely reduced, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

[Appendix D2]
In the specific period from when it is determined that the first movable accessory member (39A) is actuated to when the first movable accessory member (39A) returns to the first position, the effect limiting unit is configured to: The gaming machine described in Appendix D1, wherein execution of the first effect is restricted when the presence of an object is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D2, the execution of the first effect in the specific period is limited even when the presence of the object is detected by the first detection unit, and therefore the first effect is erroneously detected by a simple process. It can be prevented from being executed.

[Appendix D3]
In the specific period from when it is determined that the first movable accessory member (39A) is actuated to when the first movable accessory member (39A) returns to the first position, the effect limiting unit is configured to: The gaming machine according to appendix D1, wherein execution of a process for confirming whether or not the presence of an object is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) is restricted.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D3, since the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the first detection unit is not executed, execution of the first effect in the specific period can be restricted, and thus the simple process is performed. It is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to erroneous detection.

[Appendix D4]
A driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the first movable accessory member (39A) between the first position and the second position;
The effect execution means (51) limits execution of the first effect between when it is determined to drive the drive means (39a) and when driving of the drive means (39a) is started. The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes D1 to D3, which is started.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D4, the execution of the first effect is restricted from immediately before the first movable accessory member is operated by the drive means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the first detection means due to the operation of the first movable accessory member.

[Appendix D5]
When the first movable accessory member (39A) is moved from the first position to the second position, the first movable accessory member (39A) is returned from the second position to the first position. A return detection means (39b) for detecting that
The effect limiting means limits execution of the first effect when the return detecting means (39b) detects that the first movable accessory member (39A) has returned to the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D4, wherein the gaming machine is released.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D5, the restriction on execution of the first effect is lifted when the return of the first movable accessory member is detected. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the first detection means due to the operation of the first movable accessory member.

[Appendix D6]
The coverage of the first image display means (341) when the first movable accessory member (39A) is in the second position is such that the second movable accessory member (39B) is in the fourth position. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D5, which is larger than a coverage rate to the first image display means (341) in the case.

[Appendix D7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix D1 to Appendix D6, wherein the first movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) have different operation frequencies in the game effect. ..

[Appendix E1]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game,
A first image display means (341) displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed,
Second image display means (391B, 392C) different from the first image display means (341),
Detection means (38a to 38d, 38A, 38B) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341),
The detection means (38a to 38d, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38A, 38B) the movable accessory members (39A, 39C) detected by
Production execution means (51) for causing the first image display means (341), the second image display means (391B, 392C) and the movable accessory member (39A, 39C) to execute the game effect in the course of the game.
Equipped with
The effect execution means (51),
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection unit (38a to 38d, 38A, 38B) for a predetermined period (touch operation reception period), the first effect ((1) is displayed on the first image display unit (341). First effect executing means for executing (touch operation effect),
Second effect execution means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39, 39C) between the first position and the second position;
Production limiting means for limiting execution of the first production on the first image display means (341) in an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second production overlap.
When execution of the first effect on the first image display means (341) is restricted by the effect restriction means, a specific effect different from the first effect is given to the second image display means (381B, 392C). Specific performance executing means to be executed by,
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E1, the execution of the first effect on the first image display means is restricted by the effect restriction means during the overlapping period. Therefore, when the detection unit detects that an object is present in the predetermined area, it is erroneously detected as being based on the motion of the player, and thus the first effect is executed. It can be prevented from occurring. On the other hand, when the execution restriction unit restricts the execution of the first effect on the first image display unit in the overlapping period, the specific effect execution unit executes the specific effect different from the first effect on the second image display unit. .. This specific effect is executed by the second image display means when the detection means detects the presence of an object in a predetermined area based on the operation of the movable accessory member in the overlapping period. That is, the specific effect is executed in the second image display means by utilizing the erroneous detection of the object by the detection means. As a result, the specific effect is executed instead of the first effect based on an erroneous detection in the predetermined period, so that not only the execution of the first effect can be restricted but also the execution of the first effect is restricted. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the case of playing.

  Further, the specific effect is executed by the second image display means instead of the first image display means by which the first effect should be executed, so that the specific effect is executed by the second image display means which is not expected by the player. Therefore, not only what type (expectation level) of the effect is executed, but also which image display means the effect is executed can be focused on. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from being diminished, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix E2]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
Compared to the first effect, the specific effect is characterized by a higher expectation (big hit expectation) for the determination result of the determination means (41) to shift to the special game state. The gaming machine described in Appendix E1.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E2, since the specific effect is relatively higher than the first effect in comparison with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled, after the first movable accessory member is activated. Amusement for games is effectively prevented, and interest for games is effectively improved.

[Appendix E3]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note E1 or supplementary note E2, characterized in that the specific effect is a finalized effect that clearly indicates that the judgment result of the judging means (41) is to shift to the special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E3, the specific effect is the finalized effect, so that the awakening for the game after the operation of the first movable accessory member is more effective than in the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented, and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix E4]
The final effect is a normal final effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare final effect (premier effect that has a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal final effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to Appendix E3, wherein the specific effect is the rare fixed effect.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E4, the specific effect is a rare finalized effect, so that the arousal for the game after the operation of the first movable accessory member is further increased as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is effectively prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix E5]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E4, wherein the second image display means (391C) is provided on the first movable accessory member (39C).

[Appendix E6]
A second movable accessory member (39B) that is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position) and is not detected by the detection means (38A, 38B);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting an object when the object exists in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (392B),
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E4, further comprising: the second image display means (392B) provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary note E5 and supplementary note E6, the specific effect is executed on the second image display means provided on the movable accessory member or the second movable accessory member by utilizing the erroneous detection of the object by the detecting means. It As a result, when the movable accessory member is in the second position for a predetermined period that causes erroneous detection, the specific effect is executed by the second image display means, so the operation of the movable accessory member and the specific effect are combined. By doing so, the enjoyment of the game can be significantly improved as compared with the case where the movable accessory member is simply activated.

[Appendix F1]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game,
A first image display means (341) displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed,
A second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341),
First detection means (38A, 38B) for detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the first image display means (391B);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
The first detecting means (38A, 38B) is moved between a first position (standby position) and a second position (operating position), and is moved between the first position and the second position. A movable accessory member (39A) detected by
Different from the first image display means (341) and the second image display means (391B), a third image display means (392A) provided on the movable accessory member (39A),
In the progress of the game, the effect execution for causing the first image display means (341), the second image display means (391B), the third image display means (392A), and the movable accessory member (39) to execute the game effect Means (51),
Equipped with
The effect execution means (51),
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the first detection unit (38A, 38B) during a first predetermined period (touch operation reception period), a first effect is displayed on the first image display unit (341). When the presence of an object in the specific area is detected by the second detection unit (38C, 38D) during a second predetermined period (touch operation reception period), the second image display unit (391B) displays the second image display unit (391B). First effect executing means for executing one effect,
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable effect member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Execution of the first effect on the first image display means (341) is restricted in a first overlapping period in which the first predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, and the second predetermined period and the Production limiting means for limiting execution of the first production on the second image display means (391B) in a second overlapping period in which the execution period of the second production overlaps,
When limiting the execution of the first effect on the second image display means (391B) in the second overlap period, the third image display means (392B) is caused to execute a specific effect different from the first effect. Specific effect execution means,
A gaming machine comprising:

[Appendix F2]
A second movable accessory member (39B) that is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position) and is not detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) is further added. The gaming machine according to Appendix F1, wherein the second image display means (391B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary notes F1 and F2, the execution of the first effect on the first image display means can be restricted by the effect restricting means in the first overlapping period in which the first predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. Is. Therefore, when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the first detection means, it is erroneously detected as being based on the motion of the player, and thus the first effect is executed. Can be prevented.

  When the presence of an object in the specific area is detected by the second detection unit during the second overlap period, the first image is displayed by the third image display unit instead of executing the first effect by the second image display unit. A specific effect different from the effect is executed. As a result, when the movable accessory member is operated in the second overlapping period, the specific effect is executed by the third image display means provided on the movable accessory member that the player does not expect, so what type is it? It is possible to focus not only on whether the (expectation) effect is executed, but also on which image display means the effect is executed. Further, since the specific effect is executed by the third image display means provided on the movable accessory member, the operation of the movable accessory member and the specific effect are combined, so that the movable accessory member is simply operated. The interest in the game can be significantly improved as compared with the case where the game is played.

[Appendix F3]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition,
The specific effect has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) for the determination result of the determination means (41) to shift to the special game state, as compared with the first effect. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1 or Supplementary Note F2.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F3, since the specific effect has a relatively higher degree of expectation than the first effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled, the operation after the movable accessory member is activated Amusement for games is effectively prevented, and interest for games is effectively improved.

[Appendix F4]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The specific effect is a finalized effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state, according to any one of Supplementary Notes F1 to F3. Amusement machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F4, since the specific effect is the final effect, the awakening for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix F5]
The final effect is a normal final effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare final effect (premier effect that has a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal final effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to Appendix F4, wherein the specific effect is the rare fixed effect.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F5, the specific effect is a rare fixed effect, so that the awakening for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved more effectively.

[Appendix G1]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game,
A first image display means (341) displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed,
A second image display means (391B) different from the first image display means (341),
First detection means (38A, 38B) for detecting the presence of an object in a predetermined area on the front side of the first image display means (391B);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting the presence of an object in a specific area on the front side of the second image display means (391B);
The first detection means (when moving between a first position (first standby position) and a second position (first operating position) and between the first position and the second position) 38A, 38B), a movable accessory member (39A) detected by
Different from the first image display means (341) and the second image display means (391B), a third image display means (392A) provided on the movable accessory member (39A),
In the progress of the game, the effect execution for causing the first image display means (341), the second image display means (391B), the third image display means (392A), and the movable accessory member (39) to execute the game effect Means (51),
Equipped with
The effect execution means (51),
First effect (touch operation effect) on the first image display means (341) when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38A, 38B) for a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period). A first effect executing means for executing
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable effect member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Production limiting means for limiting execution of the first production on the first image display means (341) in an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second production overlap.
When execution of the first effect on the first image display means (341) is restricted by the effect restricting means during the overlapping period, the second image display means (381B) is used instead of the first effect. The first specific effect that clearly indicates the predetermined period is executed, and when the object is detected in the specific region during the predetermined period, the third image display unit (392C) displays the first effect and the first specific effect. Specific effect executing means for executing a second specific effect different from the effect,
A gaming machine comprising:

[Appendix G2]
A second movable accessory member (39B) that is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position) and is not detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B) is further added. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to Appendix G1, wherein the second image display means (391B) is provided on the second movable accessory member (39B).

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary notes G1 and G2, execution of the first effect on the first image display means is restricted by the effect restriction means during the overlapping period. Therefore, when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the first detection means, it is erroneously detected as being based on the motion of the player, and thus the first effect is executed. Can be prevented. On the other hand, when the effect limiting means limits the execution of the first effect on the first image display means in the overlapping period, the first specific effect is executed on the second image display means instead of the first effect, and the identification is performed. On condition that the presence of an object in the area is detected, the third image display means executes the second specific effect different from the first effect and the first specific effect. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the case where the execution of the first effect is simply limited. Further, when the movable accessory member is at the first position in the overlapping period, the second specific effect is executed by the third image display means provided on the movable accessory member, so that the operation of the movable accessory member and the first By combining the two specific effects, the enjoyment of the game can be significantly improved as compared with the case where the movable accessory is simply operated.

[Appendix G3]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition,
The second specific effect has a higher degree of expectation (big hit expectation degree) with respect to the determination result of the determination means (41) relatively shifting to the special game state, as compared with the first effect. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1 or Supplementary Note G2.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G3, since the second specific effect has a relatively higher degree of expectation than the first effect, compared to the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled, after the movable accessory member is activated. Amusement for games is effectively prevented, and interest for games is effectively improved.

[Appendix G4]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition,
The game according to supplementary note G1 or supplementary note G2, characterized in that the second specific effect is a finalized effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G4, the second specific effect is the final effect, so that the awakening for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented, and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix G5]
The final effect is a normal final effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare final effect (premier effect that has a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal final effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to Appendix G4, wherein the second specific effect is the rare fixed effect.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G5, the specific effect is a rare fixed effect, so that the awakening for the game after the operation of the movable accessory member is more effective than in the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved more effectively.

[Appendix H1]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game,
An image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed,
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
It is moved between a first position (standby position), a second position (operating position), and an intermediate position between the first position and the second position, and is moved between the first position and the second position. A movable accessory member (39) detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) when being moved between
Production execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the course of the game,
Equipped with
The effect execution means (51),
First effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) for a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
Second execution of a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) of moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position, the second position, the first position and the second position Production execution means,
During the predetermined period, execution of the first effect is restricted when the movable accessory member (39) is in the second position, and when the movable accessory member (39) is in the intermediate position, the first effect is restricted. A production limiting means that enables execution of one production,
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H1, execution of the first effect is limited when the movable accessory member is at the second position for a predetermined period, while the first effect is performed when the movable accessory member is at the intermediate position. The execution of is not limited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to the operation of the movable accessory member being erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player, and the movable accessory member is positioned at the intermediate position. It is possible to prevent the execution of the first effect from being unnecessarily limited in the case of.

[Appendix H2]
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38) when the movable accessory member is in the second position in the predetermined period, the effect execution means (51) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1, further comprising a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect different from the one effect.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H2, when the presence of the object in the predetermined region is detected by the detection unit for the object when the movable accessory member is in the second position for the predetermined period, the first effect is performed by the specific effect execution unit. A specific effect different from is executed. That is, the specific effect is executed by utilizing the erroneous detection of the object by the detection means. In this way, the specific effect is executed instead of the first effect based on the erroneous detection in the predetermined period, so that not only the execution of the first effect can be limited but also the execution of the first effect is limited. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game as compared with the case of being played.

[Appendix H3]
The movable accessory member (39) further includes a second image display means (392C) different from the image display means (341),
The gaming machine according to supplementary note H2, wherein the specific effect executing means causes the second image display means (392C) to execute the specific effect when execution of the first effect is restricted.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H3, the specific effect is executed by the second image display means different from the image display means rather than the image display means for which the first effect should be executed. Therefore, not only what kind of (expectation) effect is executed by the second image display means that the player does not expect, but also by which image display means the effect is executed. You can also focus on that. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from being diminished, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix H4]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition,
Compared to the first effect, the specific effect is characterized by a higher expectation (big hit expectation) for the determination result of the determination means (41) to shift to the special game state. The gaming machine according to supplementary note H2 or supplementary note H3.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H4, the specific effect has a relatively higher degree of expectation than the first effect, so that the operation after the movable accessory member is activated, as compared with the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. Amusement for games is effectively prevented, and interest for games is effectively improved.

[Appendix H5]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H2 or Supplementary Note H3, wherein the specific effect is a finalized effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determining means (41) is to shift to the special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H5, the specific effect is the finalized effect, so that the awakening effect on the game after the operation of the first movable accessory member is more effective than when the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is prevented, and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix H6]
The final effect is a normal final effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51), and a rare final effect (premier effect that has a lower probability of being executed by the effect executing means (51) than the normal final effect. ) And
The gaming machine according to Appendix H5, wherein the specific effect is the rare fixed effect.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H6, the specific effect is a rare finalized effect, so that the arousal of the game after the operation of the first movable accessory member is further increased compared to the case where the first effect is executed as scheduled. It is effectively prevented and the interest in the game is improved more effectively.

[Appendix H7]
The detection means (38) is
When the movable accessory member (39) is at the intermediate position, the presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the image display unit (341) is not detected,
Additional Notes H1 to H6, wherein when the movable accessory member (39) is in the second position, the presence of an object in the predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341) is detected. A gaming machine according to any one of 1.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H7, the presence of the object is detected by the detection unit in a predetermined period while preventing the first effect from being executed by erroneous detection when the movable accessory member (39) is at the intermediate position. When it is detected, the first effect can be executed.

[Appendix H8]
In the specific period from when it is determined that the movable accessory member (39) is operated to the second position until the movable accessory member (39) is returned to the second position, The gaming machine according to appendix H1, wherein execution of the first effect is restricted when the presence of an object is detected by the detection means (38).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H8, the execution of the first effect in the specific period is limited even when the presence of the object is detected by the detection unit, so the first effect is executed by a false detection by a simple process. Can be prevented.

[Appendix H9]
The effect restricting means is configured to detect the detecting means (38) during a specific period from when the movable accessory member (39) is determined to be actuated until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position. ) Restricts the execution of the process of confirming whether or not the presence of an object is detected by the above).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H9, since the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the detection unit is not executed, execution of the first effect in the specific period can be restricted, and thus the false detection is performed by a simple process. Thus, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed.

[Appendix H10]
Further comprising drive means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable accessory member (39) among the first position, the intermediate position and the second position,
The drive means (39a) is determined after it is determined that the effect limiting means drives the drive means (39a) to move the movable accessory member (39) from the first position to the second position. The gaming machine according to supplementary note H8 or supplementary note H9, wherein the limitation of execution of the first effect is started before the driving of the game machine is started.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H10, the execution of the first effect is limited immediately before the movable accessory member is activated by the drive means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix H11]
When the movable accessory member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position, it is detected that the movable accessory member (39) is returned from the second position to the first position. A return detection means (39b),
The effect restricting means releases the restriction on the execution of the first effect when the return detecting means (39b) detects that the movable accessory member (39) has returned to the second position. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H8 or Supplementary Note H9.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H11, the restriction on execution of the first effect is lifted when the return of the movable accessory member is detected. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix I1]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game,
An image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed,
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
Detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) when moved between a first position (standby position) and a second position (operating position), and when moved between the first position and the second position A movable accessory member (39),
Production execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the course of the game,
Equipped with
First effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) for a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable effect member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Production limiting means for limiting execution of the second production in an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second production overlap.
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to appendix I1, since the execution of the second effect can be restricted in a predetermined period, it is erroneously detected that the player has operated the image display means based on the operation of the movable accessory member. It is possible to prevent the first effect from being unnecessarily executed due to this.

[Appendix I2]
The game according to supplementary note I1, wherein the effect limiting unit limits execution of a process for starting the second effect when it is determined that it is a timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I2, the second effect in the predetermined period is limited by restricting the execution of the process for starting the second effect even when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period. Since it is possible to limit the execution of the first effect, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix I3]
When the timing for starting the second effect is the predetermined period, the second effect executing means causes the second effect to be executed when a certain period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in Appendix I2.

[Appendix I4]
The gaming machine according to appendix I3, wherein the time when the predetermined period has elapsed is the end of the predetermined period.

[Appendix I5]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note I3 or supplementary note I4, wherein the time when the predetermined period of time has elapsed is the end time of the first production when the first production is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I3 to supplementary note I5, when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period, the second effect is executed when a certain period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period. Therefore, while preventing erroneous detection that the operation of the image display means is performed due to the operation of the movable accessory member, at the time when a certain period elapses from the start of the predetermined period, for example, the predetermined period or the first effect. After the end, the second effect, which is generally executed as an effect with high expectations, is executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in and interest in the game.

[Appendix I6]
The gaming machine according to appendix I1, wherein the effect executing means (51) limits execution of a process of confirming whether or not it is a timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I6, the execution of the second effect in the predetermined period can be restricted by restricting the execution of the process of confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the second effect in the predetermined period. It is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix J1]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game,
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed, based on the satisfaction of the determination condition,
An image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed,
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
Detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) when moved between a first position (standby position) and a second position (operating position), and when moved between the first position and the second position A movable accessory member (39),
Production execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the course of the game,
Equipped with
The effect execution means (51),
First effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) for a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable effect member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Equipped with
The first effect has a higher probability of being executed by the first effect executing means and a lower probability of being executed by the first effect executing means (51) than the normal effect, and the determining means (41) ) Includes a rare effect (premier effect) that clearly indicates that the determination result in () is to shift to the special game state,
When the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) during the predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period), the second effect execution means causes the first effect means to perform the first effect. When it is determined that the rare effect is executed as the effect, the detection unit (38a to 38d) causes the detection unit (38a to 38d) to perform the operation until the forced operation time set to a time shorter than the predetermined period elapses. When the presence of an object in a predetermined area is not detected, the second effect is shifted to the special game state by the forced operation of the movable accessory member (39) before the predetermined period has elapsed. Perform as a performance that clearly indicates that there is,
The first effect executing means detects the presence of an object in the predetermined area by the forced operation of the movable accessory member (39) by the detecting means (38a to 38d), and thus, as the first effect. A game machine that executes the rare effect.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1, when it is determined that the rare effect is to be executed as the first effect, an object in a predetermined area is detected by the detection means from the start of the predetermined period until the forced operation time elapses. Is not detected, the movable accessory member is forcibly activated before the elapse of a predetermined time. Since such a forced actuation of the movable accessory member which is not expected by the player can give a surprise or shock to the player, interest and interest in the game can be improved. Further, since the detection effect is executed by utilizing the false detection due to the forcible operation of the movable accessory member, the player can be sure to see the first effect. Then, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note J1, since a rare effect that clearly indicates that the determination result is to shift to the special game state is executed as the first effect, the rare effect is caused by an erroneous detection due to the operation of the movable accessory member. When the rare effect that can rarely be seen is determined as the detection effect by being executed, the rare effect can be surely shown to the player, and an unexpected movable accessory member By executing the rare effect in addition to the operation of, it is possible to further surprise and shock the player. As a result, the interest and interest of the game can be further improved.

[Appendix J2]
A game state transition means (41) for transitioning the game state between the information game state in which the information game for informing the determination result of the determination means (41) is executed and the special game state,
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The special game state is a first special game state in which the first special game is executed (5R normal jackpot game state) and a second special game state in which the second special game is executed (5R probability variation jackpot game state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) and
The informing game state includes a first informing game state and a second informing game state in which it is more likely than the first informing game state that the determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state. ,
The game state transition means (41) shifts to the first notification game state after the end of the first special game, and shifts to the second notification game state after the end of the second special game,
The rare effect clearly indicates that the determination result by the determination means (41) is to be transferred to the second special game state by the game state transfer means (41) after the notification game is finished. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J2, the rare effect is an effect that clearly shows that the determination result by the determination means is to shift to the (second) special game state ((probably changed) jackpot game state). That is, the rare effect is executed as an effect that clearly indicates that the (second) special game state ((probably changed) jackpot game state) is to be shifted due to erroneous detection due to the forced operation of the movable accessory member. This allows the player to know that the determination result is advantageous before the notification game ends, when the rare effect is executed after the compulsory actuation of the movable accessory member. Can be improved.

[Appendix J3]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note J1 or supplementary note J2, wherein the effect limiting unit limits execution of the second effect when the first effect is not the rare effect.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J3, execution of the second effect in the overlapping period is restricted by the effect restricting means when the first effect is not a rare effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed against the player's will due to an erroneous detection based on the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix K1]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game,
An image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed,
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
The detector (38a-) is moved between a first position (first standby position) and a second position (first operating position), and is moved between the first position and the second position. 38d) detects the first movable accessory member (39A),
The detection means (38a-) is moved between a third position (second standby position) and a fourth position (second operating position), and is moved between the third position and the fourth position. 38d) a second movable accessory member (39B) which is not detected by
Production execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341), the first movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) to execute a game effect in the course of the game.
Equipped with
The effect execution means (51),
First effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) for a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
The first movable accessory member (39A) is moved between the first position and the second position, or the second movable accessory member (39B) is moved between the third position and the fourth position. Second effect execution means for executing a second effect (movable accessory member operation effect) that is moved between
In the overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, it is possible to limit the execution of the second effect by the first movable accessory member (39A) executed by the second effect executing means. And a production limiting means that does not limit execution of the second production by the second movable accessory member (39B),
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K1, since execution of the second effect by the first movable accessory member can be restricted in a predetermined period, a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means based on the operation of the first movable accessory member. Again, it is prevented from being erroneously detected as an operation performed by the player.

  Further, the second movable accessory member is not detected by the detection means when the object is moved between the third position and the fourth position. Therefore, erroneous detection by the detection unit does not occur due to the operation of the second movable accessory member, and thus it is possible to prevent the operation of the second movable accessory member that does not cause erroneous detection from being unnecessarily limited. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous by preventing the execution of the movable accessory effect from being excessively restricted, and to suppress a decrease in interest and interest in the game.

[Appendix K2]
When it is determined that it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period, the effect restricting means restricts the execution of the process of starting the operation of the first movable accessory member. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K1.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K2, the process of starting the operation of the first movable accessory member is started even when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period. Since the execution of the first movable accessory effect in the predetermined period can be restricted by limiting the execution, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix K3]
When the timing for starting the first movable accessory effect is the predetermined period, the effect restricting unit causes the second movable accessory member to perform the second operation when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in appendix K2, which is characterized by causing the production to be executed.

[Appendix K4]
The gaming machine according to appendix K3, wherein the time when the predetermined period has elapsed is the end of the predetermined period.

[Appendix K5]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note K3, wherein the time when the certain period of time has elapsed is an end time of the first effect when the first effect is executed.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note K3 to Supplementary Note K5, when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period, when the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the predetermined period, The second effect by one movable accessory member is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the first movable accessory member from being erroneously detected as an operation on the image display unit, and at the time when a certain period of time elapses from the start of the predetermined period, for example, the predetermined period or the first period. After the end of the effect, the second effect by the first movable accessory member, which is generally executed as a highly expected effect, is executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest or interest in the game.

[Appendix K6]
The effect limiting means limits the execution of the process of confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period, and the supplementary note K1 is provided. Amusement machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K6, execution of the second effect in the predetermined period is restricted by restricting execution of a process of confirming whether or not it is time to start the second effect by the first movable accessory member in the predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix K7]
The coverage of the image display means (341) when the first movable accessory member (39A) is at the second position is the same as when the second movable accessory member (39B) is at the fourth position. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes K1 to K6, characterized in that it is larger than the coverage of the image display means (341).

[Appendix K8]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes K1 to K7, wherein the first movable accessory member (39A) and the second movable accessory member (39B) have different operation frequencies in the game effect. ..

[Appendix L1]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game,
An image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed,
Detection means (38a to 38d) for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
Detected by the detecting means (38a to 38d) when moved between a first position (standby position) and a second position (operating position), and when moved between the first position and the second position A movable accessory member (39),
Production execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute a game effect in the course of the game,
Equipped with
The effect execution means (51),
First effect executing means for executing a first effect (touch operation effect) when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means (38a to 38d) for a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period);
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable effect member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
Production restriction means for limiting execution of one of the first production and the second production in an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second production overlap.
The production limiting means can limit the execution of the second production when the predetermined period is started before the overlapping period, and the execution period is started before the overlapping period. In this case, it is possible to limit the execution of the first effect, the game machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L1, execution of the second effect is restricted when the predetermined period starts before the overlapping period, and thus it is detected that an object exists in the predetermined region by the operation of the movable accessory member. The means is prevented from erroneously detecting, and the execution of the first effect is restricted when the execution period is started earlier than the overlapping period, whereby the movable accessory member is actuated so that an object is present in a predetermined area. It is possible to prevent the detection unit from erroneously detecting the existence. Therefore, when the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, the operation of the movable accessory member is performed regardless of whether the predetermined period is started first or the execution period is started first. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection based on erroneous detection, and it is possible to prevent unnecessary detection performance from being performed based on erroneous detection.

[Appendix L2]
The effect restricting means (38a) detects the detecting means (38a) during a specific period from when it is determined that the movable accessory member (39) is actuated until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the first position. ~ 38d), if the presence of an object is detected, the execution of the first effect is limited, the gaming machine according to supplementary note L1.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L2, the execution of the first effect in the specific period is limited even when the presence of the object is detected by the detection unit, and therefore the first effect is erroneously detected by a simple process in the overlapping period. Can be prevented from being executed.

[Appendix L3]
The effect restricting means detects the detecting means (38a to 38a) during a specific period from when the movable accessory member (39) is determined to be actuated until the movable accessory member (39) returns to the standby position. 38d) restricts the execution of the process of confirming whether or not the presence of an object is detected by 38d), and the gaming machine according to supplementary note L1.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L3, since the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the detection unit is not executed in the specific period, it is possible to limit the execution of the detection effect in the overlapping period. Execution of the detection effect due to erroneous detection can be prevented.

[Appendix L4]
A driving means (39a) for applying a driving force for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
The effect restricting means starts the restriction of the execution of the first effect from when it is determined to drive the driving means (39a) to when the driving of the driving means (39a) is started. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1 to L3.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L4, execution of the first effect is restricted immediately before the movable accessory member is operated by the drive means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix L5]
When the movable accessory member (39) is moved from the first position to the second position, it is detected that the movable accessory member (39) has returned from the first position to the second position. A return detection means (39b),
The effect limiter releases the restriction on the execution of the first effect when the return detector (39b) detects that the movable accessory member (39) has returned to the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes L1 to L4.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L5, the restriction on the execution of the first effect is lifted when the return of the movable accessory member is detected. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent erroneous detection by the detection means due to the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix L6]
Any of the supplementary notes L1 to L5 characterized in that, when it is determined that it is time to start the second demonstration in the predetermined period, the effect restricting unit restricts execution of the process for starting the second effect. A game machine described in Crab.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L6, the second effect in the predetermined period is limited by limiting the execution of the process for starting the second effect even when it is determined that it is time to start the second effect in the predetermined period. Since it is possible to limit the execution of the second effect, it is possible to prevent the second effect from being executed due to an erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix L7]
The game according to any one of supplementary notes L1 to L5, characterized in that the production limiting means limits execution of a process for confirming whether or not it is a timing to start the movable accessory production in the predetermined period. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L7, the execution of the movable accessory effect in the acceptance period can be restricted by limiting the execution of the process of confirming whether or not it is the timing to start the movable accessory effect in the acceptance period. It is possible to prevent the detection effect from being executed due to erroneous detection by a simple process.

[Appendix M1]
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game,
An image display means (341) for displaying a variable display image in which a decorative pattern (main pattern) is variably displayed,
First detection means (38A, 38B) for detecting an object when the object exists in a first predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341);
Second detection means (38C, 38D) for detecting an object when the object exists in a second predetermined area that is at least partially different from the first predetermined area on the front side of the image display means (341). )When,
An object exists in the first predetermined area or the second predetermined area based on both the detection result of the first detection means (38A, 38B) and the detection result of the second detection means (38C, 38D). A first judging means (51) for judging whether or not
Second determination means for determining whether or not an object exists based on one of the first detection means (38A, 38B) and the second detection means (38C, 38D) when a specific condition is satisfied. (51),
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note M1, the presence of an object is determined by the first determination means based on the detection results of both the first detection means and the second detection means, but if a specific condition is satisfied, The second determination means determines whether or not an object exists based on one of the first detection means and the second detection means. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied, for example, even if a problem may occur by referring to the detection results of both the first detection unit and the second detection unit, the object detection based on one detection unit is performed. By judging the existence, it is possible to appropriately judge whether or not the object exists while preventing the occurrence of a defect.

[Appendix M2]
A movable accessory member (39) that is moved between a first position (first standby position) and a second position (first operating position) set in the first predetermined region,
The first determination means (51) controls the first detection means (38C, 38D) and the second detection means (38C, 38D) when the movable accessory member (39) is at the first position. Based on whether to detect the presence of an object in the first predetermined region or the second predetermined region,
The second determination means (51) is based on the second detection means (38C, 38D), as the specific condition is satisfied when the movable accessory member (39) is in the second position. The gaming machine according to appendix M1, wherein it is determined whether or not an object exists in the second predetermined area.

[Appendix M3]
When the movable accessory member (39) is moved between the first position and the second position, the movable accessory member (39) is detected by the first detection means (38A, 38B), and the second detection means (38C, 38C). 38D) is not detected. The gaming machine described in appendix M2.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note M3, when the movable accessory member is at the second position, it is not determined whether or not there is an object in the first predetermined area based on the first detection means, and based on the second detection means. It is determined whether or not there is an object in the second predetermined area. Therefore, when the movable accessory member is at the second position, it is possible to prevent the operation of the movable accessory member from being erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player. Further, even when the movable accessory member is operating, it is possible to determine whether or not the player has performed a touch operation on the second predetermined area. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the touch effect based on the touch operation by the player in a region other than the operation region of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix M4]
The movable accessory member (39) is moved by the first detection means (38A, 38B) and the second detection means (38C, 38D) when moved between the first position and the second position. The gaming machine described in Appendix M2, which is detected.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note M4, it is possible to detect that the movable accessory member is in the second position even if one of the first detection means and the second detection means fails, for example, when the game is in progress. . In addition, when checking the operation of the movable accessory member when the main power of the gaming machine is turned on, it is checked that the movable accessory member is in the second position only by the detection result of the first detection means. On the contrary, by checking only the detection result of the second detection means that the movable accessory member is in the second position, it is checked whether the first detection means and the second detection means are out of order. It also becomes possible.

[Appendix M5]
In the progress of the game, there is further provided effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) and the movable accessory member (39) to execute the game effect.
The effect execution means (51),
First effect (touch operation effect, alternative touch operation effect) triggered by the existence of an object in the first predetermined area or the existence of an object in the second predetermined area in a predetermined period (touch operation acceptance period) A first effect executing means for executing
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect (movable effect member operation effect) for moving the movable accessory member (39) between the first position and the second position;
In the overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap, it is possible to limit the execution of the first effect triggered by the existence of an object in the first predetermined region, and the second predetermined period. An effect limiting means for enabling execution of the first effect triggered by the presence of an object in the area;
The gaming machine described in appendix M3, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M5, an object is placed in the first predetermined area during the execution period of the second effect by the movable accessory member detected by the first detection unit when the game machine is moved between the first position and the second position. Execution of the first effect triggered by the presence of is limited by the effect limiting unit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detection effect from being executed due to the operation of the movable accessory member being erroneously detected as a touch operation performed by the player. On the other hand, when the object is present in the second predetermined area outside the detection range of the first detection means, the second detection means detects the presence of the object even during the execution period of the second effect. One effect is executed without restriction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being unnecessarily executed, and it is possible to prevent the execution frequency of the first effect from being extremely reduced.

[Appendix M6]
The effect limiting unit limits the execution of the process of confirming whether or not the presence of an object is detected by the first detecting unit (38A, 38B) during the overlapping period. Amusement machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note M6, since the process of confirming whether or not the presence of the object is detected by the first detection unit is not executed in the overlapping period, execution of the first effect in the overlapping period can be restricted, which is simple. With such a process, it is possible to prevent the detection effect from being executed due to erroneous detection.

[Appendix M7]
The effect limiting means limits the execution of the first effect when the presence of an object is detected by the first detecting means (38A, 38B) in the overlapping period, and the additional effect M6 is described. Game machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note M7, the execution of the first effect in the specific period is limited even when the presence of the object is detected by the detection unit, and therefore the first effect is erroneously detected by a simple process in the overlapping period. Can be prevented from being executed.

[Appendix M8]
The first effect executing means, when the presence of an object in the second predetermined area is detected by the second detecting means (38C, 38D) during the overlap period, the first effect is displayed on the image display means ( 341) The gaming machine according to any one of appendices M5 to M7, which is executed in an area corresponding to the second predetermined area.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note M8, since it is possible to prevent the first effect executed by the image display means from being restricted, when the execution of the first effect by another effect means (for example, a speaker or a lamp) is restricted. As compared with the above, it is possible to effectively suppress a decrease in interest due to the limitation of the execution of the first effect.

[Appendix M9]
A second image display means (391B) arranged at a position corresponding to the second predetermined area and different from the first image display means (341),
The first effect executing means, when the effect restricting means restricts the execution of the first effect triggered by the existence of an object in the first predetermined area in the overlapping period, the first effect executing means In any one of appendices M5 to M8, characterized in that when the presence of an object is detected by the second detection means (38C, 38D), the first effect is executed by the second image display means. The game machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note M9, when the second image display means is provided, it is possible to prevent the first effect executed by the second image display means from being limited, and therefore other effect means (for example, a speaker or a lamp). As compared with the case where the execution of the first effect is restricted in (1), it is possible to effectively suppress the decrease in interest due to the restriction of the execution of the first effect.

[Appendix M10]
The specific condition is that the presence of an object in the first predetermined region or the second predetermined region is detected by one of the first detection unit (38A, 38B) and the second detection unit (38C, 38D). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices M1 to M9, which is in a state in which the gaming machine cannot be played.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note M10, is there an object based on one of the first detection means and the second detection means by the second determination means when the first detection means or the second detection means is out of order? It is determined whether or not. Therefore, even when the first detection unit or the second detection unit is out of order, whether there is an object, for example, a touch operation is performed on a predetermined area on the front side of the image display unit by the detection unit that is not out of order It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

[Appendix M11]
In any one of appendices M1 to M10, the specific condition is that an operation check of the first sensing means (38A, 38B) or the second sensing means (38C, 38D) is performed. The game machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note M11, when the operation check of the first detection means or the second detection means is performed, an object exists based on one of the first detection means and the second detection means by the second determination means. It is determined whether or not to do it. Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not one of the first detection means and the second detection means is out of order. Here, the operation check of the first detection means or the second detection means includes, for example, an operation check executed when the main power source is turned on. Further, the operation chuck can be performed during the progress of the game. For example, when the movable accessory member is moved to the second position, it is determined whether or not the object is present by the second determination means based on the detection result of one of the first detection means and the second detection means. By making a determination, it is possible to perform an operation check as to whether or not one of the first detection means and the second detection means is normally operated. Then, the operation check in Supplementary Note M11 includes not only the operation check executed when the main power source is turned on, but also the operation check executed when the game progresses.

10: Gaming machine 25: Panel 38: Detection sensor 38a: Upper left detection sensor 38b: Lower left detection sensor 38c: Upper right detection sensor 38d: Lower right detection sensor 38A: First main detection sensor 38B: Second main detection sensor 38C: First Sub detection sensor 38D: second sub detection sensor 38E: sub detection sensor 341: symbol display portions 39, 39C: movable accessory member 392C: display portion 39A: main movable accessory member 392A: display portion 39B: sub movable accessory member 391B: Display unit 39a: Motor 39a1: First motor 39a2: Second motor 39b: Return detection unit 39c: Motor driver 4: Main controller 41: MPU
5: Voice lamp control device 51: MPU
6: Display control device

Claims (1)

Main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
Determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
An image display means for displaying a variable display image in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed,
Detection means for detecting an object when the object exists in a predetermined area on the front side of the image display means,
A movable accessory member which is moved between a first position and a second position, and which is detected by the detection means when moved between the first position and the second position;
Production execution means for causing the image display means and the movable accessory member to execute the game production in the progress of the game,
Equipped with
The effect execution means,
First effect executing means for executing a first effect when the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detecting means for a predetermined period;
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect of moving the movable accessory member between the first position and the second position;
Equipped with
In the case of executing the second effect as an effect that clearly indicates that the determination result of the determination means is to shift to the special game state in an overlapping period in which the predetermined period and the execution period of the second effect overlap. In the case where the presence of an object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means, the game effect of the type according to the situation when the presence of the object in the predetermined area is detected is executed. A gaming machine.

Images